Google This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on Hbrary shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project to make the world's books discoverable online. It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover. Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the publisher to a library and finally to you. Usage guidelines Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we liave taken steps to prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying. We also ask that you: + Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for personal, non-commercial purposes. + Refrain fivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help. + Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it. + Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite severe. About Google Book Search Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web at |http : //books . google . com/| /^i i '^ .<i if \ ■•' /<^ THE- CHINESE GOVERNMENT. A MANUAL OF CHINESE TITLES, CATEGORICALLY ARRANGED AND EXPLAINED, WITH AN APPENDIX. BY WILLIAM FREDERICK MAYERS, CHINESE SECRETARY TO HER BRITANNIC M AJESTy's LEGATION AT PEKING; AUTHOR OF " THE CHINESE READER'S MANUAL," etc., etc. SECOND EDITION. With additions by G. M. H. PLAYFAIR, H.B.M. Acting Vice-Consul, Shanghai. SHANGHAI, HONGKONG, & YOKOHAMA: KELLY & \A/'ALSH, LIMITED. LONDON: TRUBNEB & CO., 57 & 59, LuDOATi HiLL. 1886. d:l 12* I, a. ^ /^HARVARD UNIVERSITY 1 LIBRARY V MAY 3 1961 SHANOHAI : KELLT & WALSB, LIMITED, PBHTTEBS, THK BUND & NAUKINa BOAD, PREFACE TO THE ORIGINAL EDITION. The object with which the present work has been undertaken is sufficiently expressed in its Title to leave little to be said in explanation of its intended scope. A happily increasing interest in Chinese studies, and the necessity which is becoming more and more widely felt for an enlarged appreciation of the modes of action adhered to by the Chinese government, justify the belief that every new contribution to the means of reference will meet with welcome; whilst, in the present instance, the labour of which the results are embodied in the ensuing pages has been stimulated by an obvious requirement of the public service. The urgent need of a key to the designations in use, in both Chinese and English, for the titles of public functionaries, which might be accepted by translators as a common rule, was represented several years ago by Sir Walter Medhurst, at that time Her Britannic Majesty's Consul at Shanghai, in an official communication addressed to Her Majesty's Minister; and the writer, who had long contemplated the preparation of some such work, owes to this circumstance the immediate inducement which has hastened the fulfilment of his design. As in many other tasks of a like description, however, the plan originally conceived soon betrayed the necessity of development in a degree unloolced for at the outset; and a variety of circumstances, besides, have intervened to delay its execution for a considerable length of time. A period of comparative leisure having allowed the design to be once more taken in hand, it has now been carried to a conclusion on a scale the tendency of which has been continually toward enlargement. A cursory inspection of the ensuing pages will suffice to shew that two main objects have been held in view in the course of their preparation. Whilst it has been sought, in the first place. IV PREFACE. to meet the requirements of the translator from Chinese texts, the attenfpt Jias iiiso been made to furnish explanations, with due regard for conciseness, which may bedf service in -fhroWkig Tight upon the varied details of the Chinese administrative fabric, for the benefit of the more general enquirer. The materials which have been arranged, with a view to facility of reference, in the twelve Parts of which the main body of the work consists, have been drawn from the immense stores of information offered by the Ta TsHng Hioei Tien, or Collected Institutes of the dynasty now occupying the throne of China. In the successive categories of ordinances and supplementary enactments which constitute this enormous work, occupying, when bound in European fashion, no less than seventy-six volumes of folio size, every detail of 'the Chinese polity is anticipated and prescribed for. The regulations they set forth, extending in date from the middle of seventeenth to the first decades of the present century, form in reality 'a code of law by which every act of the imperisd government, from the daily movements of the sovereign to the conduct of the lowest official functionary, is strictly bound to be guided. The student to whom this repertory is accessible will have little difficulty in recognizing the fact, which to others may perhaps, though in a 'less marked degree, be made clear by the present woi*k, that the found- ations of the Chinese State repose upon an all-pervading officifdism, a bureaucracy trained through the national system of education to apply the maxims of government enunciated centuries before the dawn of the Christian era, and impelled by motives of self-interest to reject the introduction of all principles at variance with these venerable dogmas. An appreciation of this condition of ai&irs may possibly tend to correct the too sanguine views whieh have been entertained of a speedy entrance of the Chinese, as a. govern- ment and people, upon the path of European progress. In order that such a result should be accomplished to any tangible exteilt, it would be necessary that the most cherished principles of the national religion should be abandoned, the ideals of literary wor^hfip dethroned, and the recognized fountain of all honour deseiHied^n PRXITAtlS. 'V favour of pursuits and doctrines which are now contemptuously ignored. A change such as this may, and perhaps will, be pro- duced under the pressure of imperious necessity if not as the consequence of revolution ; but it would be a delusion to anticipate it as'brougltt about by voluntary development. The dvnastic Institutes beinc^ thus reooornized as the livins: constitutional law of China, they have naturally been taken as the basis for the present work ; but, on the other hand, the divisions under which the subject-matter has been arranged have been decided upon with reference exclusively toHhe. convenience of the 'European reader. For the explanatory matter, a number of authorities have been relied upon, the most important of which are acknowledged in their respective places. The most detailed attempts at explanation have been devoted to those branches of the subject which are comparatively remote from the beaten track of study, and upon which, consequently, a new source of information is likely to be the more useful. This has been especially the case with reference to the Chinese system of literary examination and titular distinctions, as also in connection with the distribution of authority in Mongolia, Turkestan, and Tibet In those portions of the work which deal more directly with the Chinese governing body, it has been the writer's endeavour to supply a want, only too familiar to students of the language, in the shape of a systematic grouping of the synonyms and epithets of courtsey which are con- tinually met with as the substitutes for official titles. A radical Index, at the end of the work, provides a ready means of identify- ing any one of these combinations by reference to the numbered paragraphs. The Appendix will be found to include explanatory notices with regard to the constitution and mode of working of the Chinese administrative organization, and also to certain peculiarities of the written style in relation to official matters which are invested, to an appreciable extent, with political as well as literary import- ance. A concluding section of the Appendix completes the task undertaken with a special eye to the requirements of a translator, in the list of renderings afforded for such European titles as are VI PBEFAOE. most generally in use. Many of these renderings are already current, and are established by long usage; others, principally those relating to the superior offices of government abroad, have been devised by the writer in consultation with scholars to whose judgment he has in more than one instance deferred; and others again are suggested by an obvious analogy. In conclusion the writer feels bound to express an acknow- ledgment of the services rendered to him, in the course of compil- ing the materials for the present work, by his two Chinese assistants Liu Yxih-ts^ai ^^^ and Yiih How-ngan 3i J^ ^, to whom he has repeatedly been indebted for the elucidation of difficult questions and who have materially co-operated in the execution of his task. Peking, November Isty 1877. TABLE OF CONTENTS. Review of the First Edition ... Introduction to the Second Edition Further Addenda'and Corrigenda Alphabetical Index to the Chinese IStles ••• ... ••• ... ..• . .• •*. ... . • •. • • • ••• . .. ... ••• ... ••• • • . Part I. — ^The Imperial Court IL— Metropolitan Administration IIL — Provincial Administration IV. — Government of Peking • . . V. — The Three Manchurian Provinces VI. — The Manchu Military Organization VII. — The Chinese Army VIII. — Hereditary Ranks, Titles of Honour, and Decorations IX. — Examinations and Official Degrees X. — Buddhism and Taoism XI. — Mongolia and Turkestan . XII. — Tibet and the Lamaist Hierarchy ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .*• ... ... ... •«. . Page. «•• • • vu ...xxvii ... xxix ... xU .*• 1 ••• 12 ... 31 .•• 44 ••• 48 .•• 51 ... 59 *•* 62 ••• 69 ••• 77 ••• 80 .*• 97 APPENDIX. Section L — Chinese Official Ranks 115 „ II. — The Chinese System of Distinctive Colloca- tion of Characters 121 jy IIL — Chinese Renderings of European Titles 129 Index of Chinese Characters 187 (From the China Rmew.) Ik the year 1876, Her Majesty the Queen of Qreat Britain and Ireland decided to add to that title the words ^' and Empress of India." What dwell most in the memory in connection with this event are^ perhaps, the immense excitement which ensned on that decision being made known to her subjects, and the fierce discussions, both in the Houses of Parliament and among the general public, as to the advisability and fitness of that addition to the style of the Sovereign. Once, however, the st^ was finally resolved upon, another question arose, viz., how the title should be rendered so as to convey exactly the desired significance to Her Majesty's Indian subjects. Simple as the problem may seem, men whose judgment may be relied on considered that the gravest interests were concerned in its proper solution, and the philological result in the shape of KaUer-i-Hmd was not arrived at without nearly as much deliberation as had been brought to bear on the political potentiality of the new title. Difiering in much, Qri^ital nations are found to agree in attaching an exaggerated importance to ceremony and etiquette ; a name has something in it to ihe native of India or Ohina, and, in intercourse with them, much often depends on a nice appreciation of the significance a name or title is intended to convey. In China, especially, it is well known that ignorance of etiquette and of ceremonial observances on the part of a foreigner may easily be construed by the punctilious official class into either intentional rudeness or barbariaii want of culture, a still less acceptable alternative. It follows that, for the foreign official, an intimate acquaintance with Chinese ceremony and its technical terms is, if not absolutely indispensable, at least highly desirable, not only for use in his intercourse with the native authorities, but to enable him to understand the full significance of passing events. To illustrate this latter point by an example : The bestowal on Li I • •• VIU Hung-chang, the Governor-General of Chih-li, of the title Win- Hwa^Tien Ta-Hioh-She (see page 13, No. 135) is a signal proof that the political influence ascribed to that official is fully appreciated by the Court of Peking, but all the importance of this step could only be appreciated by those who know that the bearer of that title is ex officio the first civilian in the Empire ; while the fact that such a distinction was granted to one of the subject race, in preference to a Manchu, still further enhances the significance of the act.* It is, as Mr, Mayers states in his Preface, chiefly to meet the wants of the foreign official class that' the work under review has been written. " The labour of which the results are embodied in the ensuing pages has been stimulated by an obvious requirement of the public service. The urgent need of a key to the designations in use, in both Chinese and English, for the titles of public functionaries, which might be accepted by translators as a common rule, was represented several years ago by Sir Walter Medhurst, at that time Her Britannic Misyesty's Consul at Shanghai, in an official communication addressed to Her Majesty's Minister; and the writer, who had long contemplated the preparation of some such work, owes to this circumstance the immediate inducement which has hastened the fulfilment of his design."! Had Mr. Mayers merely given a list of Chinese titles side by side with authorised equivalents in English, he would even then have conferred a boon on the official classy of foreigners, for " a key fWhich might be accepted by translators as a common rule," would of itself shorten the toil of the translator and obviate many of those explanatory notes which have hitherto been so often necessary ; such a key would play in fact mdch the same labour- saving r6le as logarithmic tables do in Mathematics. * See Decree of January 9th, 1875, in "Translations of the PeUng Gazette^' for that year. t PrefacCi iii. IZ The author has not, however, confined himself to such a perfunctory accomplishment of his task. Beyond the mere translation of titles and terms, Mr. Mayers has supplied many details of customs and usag^es, besides notes of a geographical and historical description, which make the volume of inLst and value for reference to those who may have no use for it as a translator's companion. So much less is promised to the reader by the title-page than the work really contains, that it is to be feared many may forego acquiring it, misled by a title which seems to herald a course of exclusively dry reading, to be undergone only by those to whom a knowledge of technical details happens to be necessary. This is far from being the case ; the latter half of the work, especially, has more of the character of an Encyclopaedia than of a dictionary, and contains in a convenient form much information only to be gleaned elsewhere from many not always accessible sources. In his Preface Mr. Mayers has set forth the raison d^Stre and the object of his new Manual, as well as the sources of his informa- tion. With a few exceptions the latter is drawn entirely from the Ta TsHng Hwei Tierij or " Collected Institutes " of the Dynasty now occupying the throne of China. These '* form in reality a code of law by which every act of the Imperial Government, from the daily movements of the sovereign to the conduct of the lowest official functionary, is strictly bound to be guided."* Moreover, any one acquainted with the Collected Institutes "will have little difficulty in recognizing that the foundations of the Chinese State repose upon an all pervading officialism." In these passages of the Preface lies the secret of the mysterious first title of the work. The Chinese Government reposes on the foundations of an all pervading officialism; the rules by which the official class is guided are set forth in the Ta Taking Hwei Tien ; the work under review is to a great extent a digest of part of the Ta TsHng Hwei Tien; ergo, Mr. Mayers ♦ Profece, iv. foels bound to name it in tlie first place ^^The CSiinese Gbvernment/' leaving an alternative designation '^ A Manual of Chinese Titles '' for those who prefer a simpler and more obviously appropriate title. It is doubtless hard on an author that he should be denied the privilege of naming his own work as he pleases, but in this case it requires little prophetic power to predict that of the two titles one will be taken and the other left, and that the preference will not be accorded to the ^* Chinese Government." For convenience of reference the book is subdivided into twelve parts, viz. : I.— The Imperial Court, II. — Metropolitan Administration, III. — Provincial Administration, rV. — Government of Peking, V. — The Three Manchurian Provinces, VL — The Manchu Military Organization, VII. — ^The Chinese Army, VIII. — Hereditary Ranks, Ac, IX. — ^Examinations and official degrees, X.— Buddhism and Taoism, XI. — Mongolia and Turkestan, XII. — ^Tibet and the Lamaist Hierarchy, followed by an appendix in three Sections, treating of | j 1. — Chinese Official Banks, 2. — Chinese System of distinctive Collocation of Characters, | 3. — Chinese renderings of European Titles. I Hm subdivision does away with the necessity for an Index in English, and any Chinese character standing first in a title, can be traced to the page on which it occurs by reference to the Badical Index at the end of the work. The twelve parts above may be classed in a general way into two divisions, the first extending to the end of Part VII, and more strictly devoted to the consideration of the titles of public functionaries in China ; the Second division has to do with Titles of Honour, and with those XL partfi of the Chinese Empire ontside the Eighteen Provinees. It is to the former, as the more practically useful, that it is proposed to accord most attention in this notice. Part I deals with the Emperor and the Imperial Family, the Imperial Nobility, and the OfBces and Departments connected with the Court, ending with an enumeration of the Imperial Mausolea, or ^^ Eastern and Western Tombs," as they are generally called by foreigners. The first personage presented is, of course, the Emperor, and a transcription in full will give a good idea of the manner in which Mr. Mayers arranges his material : HwAl^G-Ti ^ *^ — The Emperor. Ordinary designation Hwang Shang § JL; Shang Jl- Title of respect T^ien-tsze yZ jy the Son of Heaven. Popular appellation Tang-kin Foh- yeU S* -^ ^ ^? the Buddha of the present day. Also Chu Tsze i "X* ^^'9 ^^^ Master, or Lord; and, in adulatory addresses. Wan Sui Yeh ^ ^ ^, t.^.. Lord of Ten Thousand Years. This is sufficiently concise; perhaps too brief a notice to give of the head and front of the Government of China. A list of the Im- perial expressions for 7, (or rather, as usage in the West requires, toe^) such as chin j^v? chSn-kung ^\^j &c., would have been most useful. Again, if Hwang Shang is the ordinary designation of the Emperor, what species of designation is Hwang Ti f It is commonly known that Hwang Ti is the term employed in Treaties and in reference to deceased Sovereigns, and presents some analogy with the '^ Caesar" of the Boman Emperors, while Hwang Shang is a colloquial expression, used also of the reigning Emperor in the Court Circular, Memorials, &c. But, in such contexts, each of these designations is ordinary^ and Mr. Mayers would have conferred a favour in drawing the requisite distinction between the two usages at the cost of a few extra lines. Lastly, Tang-kin Foh-yeh and Wan Sui Yeh are by no means the only expressions metaphorically applied to the Emperor. He is occasionally alluded to as the ^^ One that looks towards the South," and is flattered by being Zll likened to dragons of various kinds and descriptions. The word Shing 1^; holy, appears in many locutions designating his person and his acts, and though he apparently arrogates to himself neither cousinship with the sun nor brotherhood with the moon, he can fairly claim many more appellations than Mr. Mayers has enumerated. The Empress and other denizens of the Harem, the Princes, Princesses and Hereditary Imperial Nobility are next noticed. It may be remarked that many of the titles of the last named are compounded partly, some entirely, of Manchu words of which the signification is of a martial nature. Thus Ho-sheh (No. 17)* and Ku-shan (No. 20) each represent Manchu words meaning a banner (analogous to the word chH ]^ still used to denote the divisions of the modern Manchu and Mongol soldiery), while hei-Uh (No. 19) is said to have the signification of a leader. The same idea is found in those of the titles of nobility which are in Chinese ; as in the epithets Chen-kwoh ^ ^ and Fu-kwoh ^ ^ (No. 21 to 28) the " Defenders and Supporters of the State," and in the very title I'siang-kiln 3^ ^j a more literal equivalent of our Duke, or dux, than ^ hung. For further information respecting the titles and designations of the Emperors and their kindred, the reader is referred by Mr. Mayers to his article on the " Chinese Imperial Family" appended to " Translations of the Peking Gazette for 1875." He will there find that Gioro (No. 30) f is equivalent to the Chinese word Shih ^j a family, and it is there incidental allusion is made to the common practice in Peking of styling the Imperial uncles of the present and late Emperors the ^^ seventh Prince " " sixth Prince," and so on, accordingly as they are the seventh, sixth, &c., sons of Hien Feng. * The Chinese Manchu Dictionary ^ffia ^t ^^ ^^ translates Uo-sheh by jj a square, -to a corner, &c. t The Dictionary referred to in the previous note translates GiOTO by i< forehead.** ZIU The remainder of Part I is taken up with a list of the various Courts and Establishments connected with the Imperial Family, and of the officials belonging to them, winding up with the names of the Imperial Mausolea. Part II. elaborates, in a satisfactory and exhaustive manner? the Metropolitan Administration (or, as more generally called, the Central Government), and its members. The term " Metropolitan Administration" must be carefully distinguished from the " Government of Peking " which is subsequently treated in Part IV. The Central Government is administered by the Councils of State, viz., the Grand Council (^ ^ ;^)j and the Grand Secretariat (^ y^j generally translated heretofore "Inner Council ") ; the Six Boards ; the Gensorate ; the Five Courts ; the Han-lin College, and the Imperial Academy. The work of these various Councils, Boards and Departments necessitates an enormous staff of officials of various ranks. The titles and duties of these are translated and explained categorically, with the addition of much information about many of them which throws still farther light on their ftinctions and attributes. Another trace of the military basis on which the government of the Manchu dynasty is organised is found in the title of the Council of State, which is, literally interpreted, "the Place of Plans for the Army.'' Mr. Mayers states that "this institution derives its origin from the practice instituted by the earlier Emperors of the present dynasty of treating public affairs on the footing of a military council, whence the title adopted in about the year 1730, for the council as it at present exists." The date given is that of the 8th year of the Emperor Yung ChSng, a sovereign whose renown depends less on feats of arms than on the excellent Chinese in which his Decrees are written. His sole campaigns seem to have been two expeditions against the Kal- mucks or Eleuths, but perhaps it was at this epoch that the Council of State obtained its new title, and superseded in xiv importance the former Supreme Council, the Grand Secretariat. The latter stiU retains, however, a nominal prestige which has not been eclipsed by the Council of State, for ^^ admission to one of the six posts which constitute its superior ranks confers the highest distinction attainable by Chinese of&cials." The superior ranks here alluded to are those of Grand Secretary and Assistant Grand Secretary, the former four, and the latter two, in number. Of these six, half in each rank a^e always Manchus and half Chinese* Since the death of Wfin-hsiang, the second of the Grand Secretaryships has remained vacant, but the three others are enjoyed by Li Hung-chang, Governor-General of Chihli, Tso Tsung-t'ang, Governor-General of Shensi and Kansuh, and Pao-yun, a prominent member of the Tsungli YamSn and a holHer of several important offices, both military and civil, at the capital. Attention has already been called in this article to the important fact that Li Hung-chang, a Chinese, is the Senior Grand Secretary. Tlie title of Tung Kohy is, in the Chinese " Red Book," ranked as No. 3 and T^i Jin Koh as No. 4, not in the order Mr. Mayers has given. If this rearrangement be correct, the Chinese Tso Tsung- t^ang is Senior to the Manchu Pao-yiin. Of the Honorary Titles (Nos. 137 to 142), Grand Preceptor, Grand Tutor, and so on, it may safely be asserted that they are obsolete. Mr. Mayers seems to have imagined that there is no distinction to be drawn between the above Preceptorships, Tutor- ships, &c., of the Emperor, and the same offices in relation to the Heir Apparents. They are, however, to all intents and purposes, nominal though the appointments be, essentially distinct. To the titles given in Nos. 137 to 142 he should have added vii* jSi^/Si 0i6 Grand Preceptor of the Heir Apparent, 16. viiL 3^ "^ ^ J# Grand Tutor of the Heir Apparent,.... 16. ix. ]^ ^F* ^fc ^ Grand Guardian of the Heir Apparent, 16. X. ^HC "^ d^ 6i6 Junior Preceptor of the Heir Apparent, 2a. xL ^ "5^ ^ 1§ Junior Tutor of the Heir Apparent, ... 2a. xiL 3J|C '^^^Jomor Guardian of &e Hair Appareiut, 2a. XV The author says, ^^ These titles are now seldom conferred with the exception of No. VI," i.e., ^ ^, Junior Quardian. As a matter of fact at the present day this title is never conferred, nor can it be said that this title is ever bestowed ^^ <m the (nominal) Guardianship of the Heir Apparent." Mr. Mayers would seem further to imply that yS^ "jr* ^ 0jjl, Junior Guardianship of the Heir Apparent, is the sole relic of these ^^ palace honours " J^ "0$ (as they are commonly called). But there are actually four eminent officials (viz., Tso Tsung-t^ang, Li Hung-chang, Ch^ong- ^hou and Pao-yiin), who all hold the title of Grcmd Guardian of the Heir ApparenL As this title was held by the late Grand Secretary, Wen-hsiang, and as it is also held by the three existent Grand Secretaries, it may fairly be inferred that Grand Guardian- ship of the Heir Apparent is essentially part of a Grand Secretary's roll of honours. Under the head of the "Tsungli Yamte" (No. 152) will be found an interesting sketch of the institution of that Chinese Foreign Office. ^^This department, like the Kon^ki-^^u or Grand Council, is considered not so much a separate organization with ranks and promotion specially appertaining to itself, as a species of cabinet formed by the admission of members of other depai'tments of state." Brought into existence by a Decree of January 19th, 1861, and comprising among its members all those of the Council of State, and six other officials of the highest rank, this Yaniin has been a living fact for seventeen years, and yet the Chinese ^^Bed Book" continues unconscious of its existence. This department superintends not merely the affairs incidental to foreign diplomatic intercourse, but also those institutions in which foreigners form part of the working staff, such as the Maritime Customs, the " Peking University," &c. The Departmental work of this office is conducted by Secretaries, of which the senior are styled Taung^pan m&i^j and the Junior Cliang^king ^^ ; these two last-named characters reproduce the sound of a Manchu word XVI meaning an " assistant," and which is properly spelled CJiang-chin^ but vulgarly pronounced Chan-yin (see page 13),* With regard to the Six Boards, it should be remarked that the order in which they are enumerated is not arbitrary. As in England where the Treasury is more aristocratic than the India Office, and the Home Department than the Colonial Office, so in China the Board of Civil Office ranks first, as would be expected in this land of officialdom. The literary designation of the Board of War, viz. {Hsi Pu j^np) is a curious one at first sight, if the character Hd be taken in the sense of a rhinoceros! It more probably means, of course, what K^ang-hi calls -^ ^t ^ B^ "strength of martial weapons." Each of the Six Boards has an almost similar staff of Pre- sidents, Vice-presidents, Secretaries and clerks, and many of their titles are held as honorary or purchased distinctions. Thus every Governor-General is ex officio President of the Board of War, while Governors of Provinces, and the Directors-General of the Yellow River, and of the Grain Transport, are similarly Vice-presidents of same Board. The Secretaryships (Nos. 163 to 166) "are very largely obtained by purchase or conferred as distinctions without entailing more than a nominal connection with the Boards to which they relate." Under these circumstances the title has generally prefixed to it the characters ^^P Nff4-wai, '* Supernumerary." This part of the book is remarkable for the conciseness and, at the same time, the comprehensiveness of its details. Though of less than twenty pages, it constitutes an excellent epitome of all the information that can be required to form a very complete idea of the machinery of the Central Government, but its contents will not be retained at the student's finger-ends without considerable study and exercise of memory. Part III has to do with the Provincial Administration and * Pih'fieh-she (No. 181) represents the sound of a Manchu word, not hit he shi^ but bit'hS'Shit literally shu-pan j^jfe, from bit-M "a book." xvii as such will have a nearer interest for residents at the Ports. The highest civilian in the provinces is the Tsung^iuh^ or Grovernor- General ;* he is not necessarily the highest ofEcial in his own pro- vince, for where there is a Tartar General that officer ranks with but before him (see No. 426); the Governor ranks with but after him, so that these three officials are sufficiently close in rank to make it impossible for any one of them to overbalance the other two; they form a triangle of which the sides are very nearly equal, any two sides being necessarily greater than the third. The career of Ying Han, who was Governor- General at Canton in 1875, illustrates this point, which is the most pronounced characteristic of the provincial policy of the present Dynasty. Ying Han, being a Manchu, might naturally have looked for the support of his fellow-countryman the Tartar General, Ch*ang Shan, in his pro- jects, but, as it turned out, the latter sided with the Governor, and Ying Han found himself overpowered. So strong was this coali- tion felt to be, that, though the Governor-General had powerful friends at Court, it was deemed necessary to dismiss him from his post. This Chinese system of equipoise (which will be found equally in force throughout the Central Administration, where every Board has two Presidents, four Vice-Presidents, and so on), finds a counterpart in Japan where each post has two incumbents, one of I O whom acts as a check on the other. To complete the system of '\ • control over the provinces, the Censors have the power of pronoun- cing abuses which may come to their knowledge. ♦ Mr. Mayers ignores the title of Viceroy so commonly applied to these officials. They cannot be held to represent the Sovereign as do our Viceroy of India and Lord Lieutenants of Ireland, but are more comparable to Our Governors of Colonies ; while the Siin-fu resemble, in most provinces, what we call Lieutenant-Governors. Observe, however, that a Tsung-tuh is not a mere Siin-fu of higher rank. Their functions are essentially different, and it is expressly stated, with regard to the Governors-General of Ssii-ch*uan, Ean-suh and Chih-li, that they exercise the duties of Governor, in addition to those of Governor-General, • •• xvm Of the Financial and Judicial Oommissioners, commonly called Provincial Treasurer and Judge, each province has one, excepting Kiang-su, which has two Treasurers, and Fuh-kien, which may be said to have two Judges, as the Intendant of Formosa (Taotai of Taiwan) has the rank and powers of a Judicial Commissioner. The privilege of addressing memorials directly to the Throne ends with the two Commissioners. The Taotai, or Intendant of Circuit, forms the link between the high officials of the province and those who come under the general designation of ^^ Local Authorities." He is the last of those who are addressed as Ta-jSuj y^ ^j and the first whose jurisdiction is limited to a certain defined portion of a province. To style him ^^ a functionary placed in administrative control over two or more Prefectures " is too restrictive. A circuit mav, and often does, comprise not only Prefectures, but also Independent Pepartments, Independent Sub- Prefectures and even towns which cannot be classed under any of these designations, such as Urumtsi and Murui, included in the ChSn-Ti (s|f| ^) circuit, Kansuh; or Shan-hai-kuan {\1J }$ 9^)^ which is under the control of the only Taotai in Shingking. There are seveniy-seven territorial circuits in China, Shensi coming first with eight, and Shingking last with one. Circuits are variously named ; generally the first characters of the subordinate cities are strung together, as in the Chi-Tung-T'ai-Wu-Lin ^M^^}^ circuit in Shantung; occasionally, however, they adopt the ancient name of the region, as the Ho-tung fSf j^ circuit, Shansi, and Liug-hsi '^ Q circuit, Kuangtung ; or their designation implies their orientcUiony as in the case of the Ch^uan-pei )\\ Hf^ (North Sstich^uan), and Kuei-hsi ]^ @§ (West Kueicbou) circuits. It being by Treaty stipulated that Consuls shall rank with Taotais, it is with the latter that the foreign authorities at the ports have most to do. Canton forms an exception, for there being no territorial Taotai resident there, Consuls communicate directly with the Gk)vemor-GI«neral and Gbvemor. At Tientsin there is a special post of ^^ Customs Taotai," with whom interna- tional business is transacted. The exceptional position of the Taotai of Formosa has already been alluded to. The "Prefects and Magistrates of different classes constitute the general administrative body of the provincial civil service." They are the officials who come most nearly in relation with the general population, and as such are called the "Father and Mother* of the people." They are commonly known as the ** local authorities." In the Eighteen Provinces there are 182 Prefectures; of these Shensi, as Mr. Mayers remarks, contains the smallest number, viz. , seven, but Kiangsi has not the honour of containing the largest, for Yiinnan comes in first with 14. There are besides two Prefec- tures in Shingking. Shun-t'ien Fu (Peking) and FSng-t^en Fu (Moukden) are exceptional Prefectures, and are administered by Governors called Fuyin )\^ ^ (See Parts IV and V). The latest addition to the Prefectures of China is T'ai-pei Fu (§ ^K) in the North of Formosa, a few miles from Tamsui. Next in rank to the Fu, is the T^ing or Sub-prefecture, which is of two kinds, either independent of, or subject to, a Prefecture. Both kinds are found to be established in positions where the administration of the laws is a matter of difficulty. There are 25 Independent Sub-prefectures in China, Ssu-chuan having the greatest number, 6, while many provinces have none. Sub- prefectures, as a rule, are to be found on the outskirts of the Empire Proper, especially where the Imperial authority is not very firmly established; others have been founded to control the aboriginal tribes in the interior of Kuangsi, Kueichou, Yiinnan, &c. There are a few 'Pings outside the Eighteen Provinces; that of Hu'-lan in Tsitsihar may be instanced (See No. 374). A new I * It may not be so generally known that Assistant Magistrates are, at Peking, jokingly called 'JM Wh 1^ yi nai-nai the "Aunts and Orand-mothers " [of the people]. Sub-prefeotare has lately been established in Kansuh (to the South of Ling Chou ^) with the name Ning-ling ^ ^• The Independent Departments, or Chih-li chow, correspond in rank to Sub-prefectures, and are a grade higher than the San-chow wL /H' ^^ Subordinate Departments. Of the two kinds there are altogether 243 in China, of which number 45 are in Kuangsi. This estimate includes, however, 29 native Departments (referred to under No. 328) which find place in the Chinese '* Red Book." Of the Sieuj or Districts, there are 1,299 in the Eighteen Provinces and 7 in Shingking. Chihli comes first with 124 and Kueichou last with 34. The average for each province is about 70. Every prefectural city, with the exception of two in Kueichou, is also a District city, and in some cases, as at Peking for instance, comprises two District cities within its limits. In one solitary instance, that of T^ai-ts^ang Chou in Kiangsu, a District city is coincident with the Chef-lieu of a department. The Hien as a division of a province, seems to have existed with little or no variation from very early times. The word itself is explained by its derivative Bsiian :}§[? thus meaning ^^ dependent [on a Pre- fecture]." While the ChUn ^ has been superseded by the Fu )3*> while the Chou tH has dwindled from a province to a de- partment, the Hien has persisted unchanged. Prefectures, Departments and Districts, as well as the offices of the high provincial authorities, are provided with a stafi^ of assistants, secretaries, clerks, &c., known by the common name of Tao Tsa ^ ^« With these is concluded the enumeration of the members of the provincial administration. The Literary Chancellor- ship (No. 323) is "a special appointment, usually filled by officials of high literary degrees who leave Peking for three years to serve in this capacity. They preside at the prefectural examinations and give the degree of Siu-ts^aV The collection of Customs at Canton and Hwai-ngan, and the manufactures of silks, &c., at Nanking, Soochow and Hangchow, are superintended by officials specially appointed from the Imperial Household. The supervision of the XXI Yellow River embankments, and the control of the Transport of Grain,* are invested in Directors-General, the headquarters in the former case being in Shantung and in the latter in Kiangsu. Each of these officials ranks as a Vice-president of the Board of War and as Junior Vice-president of the Censorate, thus being on the same footing as Governors of Provinces. Among the mountain ranges of Kuangtung, Kuangsi, Yiin- nan, Kueichou and Ssiichu'an there remain to the present day tracts of country inhabited by aboriginal tribes which the Chinese have never been able to reduce to complete subjection. The government of these semi-independent tribes " in general is left in the hands of their hereditary chieftains, upon whom high sounding titles of various degrees are bestowed in accordance with a system introduced originally by the Mongol conquerors of China," The independence of the aborigines in Formosa is even more complete, though the island is perhaps on the eve of a change in that respect. The Japanese expedition awoke the Chinese Government rather roughly to a sense of its short-comings, and the establishment of a District (called HSng-ch*un fS ^); at the south of the island, was the first step in the required direction. Even now (or at least until very lately) the Magistrate at Heng-ch*un continues to pay black-mail quarterly to the chief of the neighbouring tribe. » The establishment of a second city at Pilam, on the South-east coast, is now contemplated, and the Formosans may be induced in process of time to hai t'u wei liu 3sC it ^ im " accept the rights of citizenship." Part IV treats of the Government of the City of Peking. Though nominally a Fuj or Prefecture^ the importance it derives from being the residence of the Court, necessitates a particular organisation in its government. Its head is not a Prefect, Chih'/uy but a Fu-yin ^ ^j which the author translates * The Director-General of the Grain Transport is, in the Ta Tiding Skei Tien, stated to be of the higher grade of the seoond rank, not of the lower grade, as classed by Mr. Mayers. ^^ (Governor," and which has been frequently rendered Mayor, He has a colleague called ^' Governor Adjoint " and, as subordinates, a Vice-Grovernor and a Sub-prefect {^/g Pp)j besides the usual staff of a prefecture. The other officials of the municipal govern- ment are connected in one way or another with the police of the metropolis, excepting a few who superintend the Peking Octroi^ Granaries and Mints. This Part contains the only humorous remark detectable throughout the book; as such it is worth quoting, and will at once recommend itself to any one who has visited Peking. '^The Boadway Office. The repair and maintenance of the streets of the outer (Chinese) City of Peking are — nominally — cared for by this department.^' Mr. Mayers is not responsible for the italics. From the wording of the final paragraph (No. 364), it might be inferred that all the cash current in China are coined at Peking. This is not so ; though fewer in number than during the early reigns of the dynasty, there are still mints in several provinces which continue to issue copper coin. It is difficult to state any- thing with certainty with regard to the present reign, but under T^ung-chih there were mints open in Fuhkien, Shantung, Shansi, Kiangsu, Hupei, Hunan, Chekiang, Kuangsi, Tiinnan, Sstich^uan, Taiwan and Chihli (at Paoting Fu). In the Peking Gazette of a few months ago there appeared a memorial from the Governor- General of Kansuh, asking to be excused from obeying a decree ordering him to reopen the Kansuh mint (formerly located at Kung-ch^ang Fu ^ |§ . ) A brief sketch, in Part Y, of the system of Government adopted in the three Manchurian provinces, is followed by a very complete r&nim4 of the Manchu Military organization in Part VL It is scarcely necessary to point out that herein lies all that is most characteristic of, and peculiar to, the reigning dynasty. The civil administration of the Ming Sovereigns suffered little change by the accession of the Manchu rulers; it is even surprising, as was pointed out in note in the China Review (Vol. YI, No. 2, page 137), to how small an extent the dominant race participates in the XXlll direct Government of the people. The sole tangible precaution adopted against revolts of the Chinese has been the stationing of Manehii troops at certain places in the Eighteen Provinces and Mongolia, to which must be added the (nominally) large garrisons in and around Peking. The balancing of authority in the pro- vincial Governments, by which no one official has a dangerous excess of power in his own hands, has already been adverted to, and acts as a safeguard against attempted treason among the official dass; while, finally, the exaggerated reverence for parental authority, which is so univereal in the Chinese people that the promises of the Fifth Commandment are by some considered to have been fulfilled towards this race, is transmuted into a species of loyalty to the office, if not to the person, of the Emperor. The Eight Banners, *' under one or another of which all living Manchus and all descendants of the Mongolian and Chinese Soldiery of the Conquest, are enrolled," together with the Chinese provincial troops, or " Army of the Green Standard " (see Part VII), constitute the standing forces of the Empire. In actual warfare, however, more practical use is made of the '^ so-called Yunff ^ braves, or irregulars, enlisted or discharged according to circumstance*." The regulars of each province are ranged under three conunands, v£2r.,that of the General-in-Chief (^2^^i-<wA), of the Governor- General, and of the Governor. The latter division forms the garrison of the provincial capital, and like that of the Governor- General, has a commandant with the title of Chimff-kuriy who fills the post of Adjutant or Military Secretary, At Canton the Governor-General's Adjutant is known as the Kuang-hip ^ ^^\ and the Governor's as the Chung-hip ^ fjjj. There are separate military organisations under the command of the Directors- General of the Yellow River and of the Grain Transport, and there is a special squadron to whom is allotted the duty of patrolling .the Yang-tsze. Mr. Mayers omits all mention of the marine forces of China. In many cases, certainly, the designations of the officers are XXIV identical with those for the corresponding ranks of the land army, but their titles would demand a different translation, and should therefore have been given. There are, besides, some few titles peculiar to the naval service, of which Kuan Chia Kuan ^ ^ Jg 7 Commander of a gunboat, may, be instanced as one. As it is, if a naval officer has the title of Yeo-Jci (No. 444), as he very well may, he must still be styled a *' Major," however incongruous the rendering may seem to Western ideas. With Part VII ends that portion of Mr. Mayers' work which has to do with the titles of public functionaries in China. As re- gards the rest of the book, it is set forth in the Preface that " the most detailed attempts at explanation have been devoted to those branches of the subject which are comparatively remote from the beaten track of study, and upon which, consequently, a new source of information is likely to be more useful. This has been especially the case with reference to the Chinese system of literary examination and titular distinctions, as also in connection with the distribution of authority in Mongolia, Turkestan and Tibet." On these points the reader is referred to the book itself, as no notice which did not deal largely in quotation could do justice to the chapters which Mr. Mayers has devoted to them^ and which are copious enough in details to form treatises by themselves. In Parts XI and XII, especially, there is packed away a vast store of information in a marvellously small space. The Sections of the Appendix are as useful in their way as the foregoing portion of the book. Section I., on the "Chinese Official Eanks," may be held to throw ^ general light over the rest of the work. It is also to some extent supplementary to Part IX on '^ Examinations and Official Degrees." The " practice of vacating office by the junior of two relatives who may be brought into contact with each other, within certain prescribed limits, in the same provincial areaf" which "is de- signated hwei pi or ' respectful withdrawal in the presence of a superior'" (page 119) was well illustrafced on^ th^. appoiatment XXV of Liu K^nn-yi in 1875 to the Governor-Generalship of Canton. Up to that time Liu Ch*ang-yu, of the same familj^ as Liu K^un- yi, and said to be his unele, was Governor of Kuangsi. The impossibility of the latter remaining as subordinate to his own nephew was so obvious that tlie decree appointing Lin Oh^ang-yu to the Governor-Generalship of Yunnan and Kueiehou appeared side by side with the announcement of his nephew's appointment to Canton. This case, it is true, cannot be considered as exactly fulfilling Mr. Mayers' definition of hwei pi, but shows how the same desired result can be effected by different means. Sections II and III will chiefly be interesting and useful to translators. The system of distinctive collocation of characters is indeed one " which cannot safely be ignored by any student of the language," especially if he be at any time engaged in official correspondence with the Chinese authorities. The list of Chinese renderings of European titles is, however, the most welcome addition of all to the body of the work. Its usefulness can be best expressed by saying that to have omitted it would have detracted seriously from the completeness of the book. It is not too much to say that Mr. Mayers is the one man whose dictum on such a subject is likely to be universally accepted, and all must be grateful to him that he has published his dicta for the general benefit. That the renderings Mr. Mayers has sanctioned will be so accepted is hardly questionable. No list of the sort has been hitherto in general use, except the few titles employed at Hongkong, and translators have been reduced to rendering European titles into Chinese in a rather haphazard way. Among the Diplomatic titles it will be noticed that Mr. Mayers has lately adopted a new rendering for the office he himself fills; this is presumably in consequence of his promotion to the local rank of a Second Secretary in the Diplomatic Service. Among the* naval titles, " Commander," was formerly translated Chu-tsiang 3E W' ^^^ perhaps the reason for the substitution of Ts^ an-tsiang should have been given, or at least some notice have been taken of the change. As a whole, however, the renderings appear to be fairly well selected and adapted. That the subject selected, and the treatment it has received combine to make a book which will add to Mr. Mayers' reputation, and which can be cordially recommended to the student and the general reader, it is hoped the foregoing pages have made suffi- ciently plain. a. M. H. PLAYFAIR. INTRODUCTION TO THE SECOND EDITION. The present edition of Mayers' Chinese Government bein^ merely a reprint of the original publication and not a revision, the publishers have entrtistdicl to me the task of embodying in an Introduction such information reorardinsj administrative changes during the past eight years as shall compensate to some extent for the emendations which would have more fittingly found a place in the body of the work. Some alterations were suggested by me in the China Review when criticising the book shortfv afler its apj^earance, and need not here be further alluded to, as the critique in question is appended to this re-issue. Sundry further corrections of the original text have occurred to me since and others have become necessary o\ying to the reorganisation of certain provinces by Imjierial Decree. I propose to add a few notes, which I consider likely to be of general interest, on what may be called Curiosities of Chinese Officialdom. The addition, finally, of an index to the Chinese titles, arranged alphabetically according to the author's own system of orthography, will prove, I trust, a means of speedier reference than the original Radical Index. G. M. H. PLAYFAIR. Shanghai, June 14th, 1886. 1 ! FURTHER ADDENDA AND CORBIGBNDA. .<•♦►- During the minority of the Emperor T^ung Chih, in 1862, the Prince of Kung was appointed Regent of the Empire. The style adopted to designate his position gives us a useful phrase, viz. : I ChSng Wang H |j; 2*— Priw<^ Regent. Another phrase, necessitated by the minority of the present Emperor, is — Hwang T'ai How Lin Ch^ao S iC JS^ tt 4B :— -Empress Dowager Regent. Her Majesty's act of regency is also described by the expresssion Ch^ui Lien T^ing Ch4ng £ H M( iSfc> literally, *' To drop the curtain and administer the CJovernment," as the ministers' eyes may not gaze on the Empress's face. No. 143. — Of the ten 8ttbchancellors, six are bannermen and four Chinese. < No. 144, — Of the iew Readers, six are . banaermen and four Chinese. No. 145. — ^The Assistant Readers are sixteen in numl^er^ not nine ; fourteen of these are Bannermen and two Chinese. No. 146. — Of the six Archivists, four are bannermen and two Chinese. XXX FUKTHER ADDENDA AND COKBIOENDA. No. 200, — Weighty affairs of State are often entrusted to the deliberations of the ^^Six Boards and Nine Ministries/' but there is likewise a more select assemblage which has similar functions, in criminal affairs, viz. : San Fah Sze H & '9* — Kie Commission of Revision, consisting of the President bf the Board of Pbnishmbhts, the President of the Censorate and the Director of the Grand Court of Revision. No. 282. — The Epistolary style of a Subprefect isalso Fen The following is a list of the denominations of Second Cl^ss Subprefects, indicating the special functions they exercise; the title l^ung Che @ ^ is to be understood after each ; mm' mm Specially apiKiintefd tii'coatBol various classes of evildoers. ^ w ! In charge of water j> ^&t I communications. rtKf mm mm ~\ > With control ovei' coast and river defence. y With 'military jurisdiction. ASfC 4^ iSt I" charge of naval construction. ' He & JT ^^ ^ With jurisdiction ov^r ,^ /^turbulent populations 1$^ and s^ypge tribes. Some of these hav6 entrusted to them a combination of duties as indicated by their titles. For instance a H jf T'ung Ch6 has FUBTHBR ABDENDA AND CORRIGENDA. XXXI to attend to the Salt Revenue as well as to keep in order turbulent characters. No, 283. — Assistant Subprefects enjoy a similar variety of denominations, as the following list shows (the title j|[ fj being understood) : — mm i! m ^ Ty mm m 19 mm. mtm^m mR m^ mm ^m jSR 9RH IB M »w mm isnr No. 284. — The Personal Designation in the recital of titles Cheng T^ang JE ^ is used of a Department Magistrate as well as of a Prefect and District Magistrate. No. 326. — The characters Ho-tung fij ^ in the title of the Director-General of the Yellow River are said to be a contraction for -ffo-nan and Shan-^ww^, the two provinces with which he is chiefly concerned. No. 329. — There are in the provinces of Kuangsi and Yunnan certain native Departments {t^u-clum i ffl) and Districts {t'u'hsien, ;j^ J|^), and one instance in Ssiich^uan of a Township {t^u-asU, i ^)j <^f which the administration is confided to hereditary rulers. In about one half of these the official is a native of the place, but in the remainder the rulers are from remote provinces of the Empire, notably from Yi-tu Hsien, which is the head District of Ch^ing-chou Fu, Shantung. It is an interesting subject of enquiry how these extra-provincials came to acquire hereditary rule over the native tribes of the southern frontiers. Subjoined is a Table of hereditary jurisdictions in Yunnan, Kuangsi and Ssiich^uan. xxxii FUBTHBR ADDENDA AND COBRI0IN3>A. T.C.== t'u-clwu ± %i T.H.= i'u^hsien ± IK; T.S,= t^U-88U i -g. District. Chieh-an ^ ^ Chi'lun ^ jSi Ssia-lei "f ^ Hsiang-wu |^J jSf Lo-yang ^ ^ Ming-ying ^ || SsU-ling g §| Chiu'hsing j\j ^ Kuo-hua ^ ^ An-pHng ^ ^ Chiang f£ Chung Jfe PHng-hsiang ^ jp| Shanq^lin Jl ^ &« is Rank. T.C. T.C. 55 T.S. T.H. T.C. 55 55 55 T.H. T.C. J3 Province. Kuangsi 5> 55 55 55 55 55 55 Ssuch^uan Kuangsi Yunnan Kuangsi 55 55 55 55 99 55 55 55 55 55 Native Place of Magistrate. Department 55 55 55 District Department 55 55 55 .^5 Li-yang Hsien, Kiangsu T'ai-ts'ang Chou, Kiangsu Shao-hsing Fu, Cheh-kiang Chehkiang ofaantnng 55 Yi-tu Hsien, Shantung 55 55 55 55 55 >5 55 Nos. 383-384. — It may be noted in connection with the titles of these two mints that the word Ts^Han j^ here is equivalent to Tauten @| "money." The latter character is of comparatively recent introduction into the language and replaced the ancient j^ which was the original word for money. The character }g has a similar meaning. No. 455-ii. The character H is a misprint for f|. FURTHER ADDENDA AlTD CORRIGENDA. XXXlii Appendix^ Section I. To his remarks on ranks^ Mr. Mayers might have added that, besides the nine buttons in common use, there is a tenth, called 'Pow pHn ting tax S^ iip IK IS ^^ highest of all, bestowed on eminent officials. The possessor, it is said, wears a red button of the 1st rank without the usual silk loop. Appendix, Section III. The following is a list of titles in use for officials of the Imperial Maritime Customs : — Inspector-General H % i[f ^ Tsung Shui Wu Sze. Chief Secretary « S X « «» ^ { ^^Jhf i wTSe''^ Chinese Secretary mnmitimm^ { ^^gl'^k^r^^te. Commissioner ^ IBf ^ ^h.m Wu Sze. Deputy Commissoner §lj ^ fSSr ^ Fu Shui Wu Sze. Assistant ^ |j| Pang Pan. Divisional Inspector jgj X ^ Siin Kung Sze. Harbour Master H j|B[ fi Li Ch'wan T4ng. Tide Surveyor i^ ^ Tsung Siin. Examiner H g Yen Hwo. Tidewaiter ^ ^ ^ K'ien Tze Show. Berthing Officer ^ fg ^ Che Po So. Recent Administrativb Reorganisation. Of recent administrative changes the first in chronological order was the assimilation of the Government of Manchuria to that of China Proper. Previous to 1876 the government of the provinces of Kirin and Hehlungkiang was, as stated in Part V., on a purely military basis; while that of Shingking, though approximating to the model of the Eighteen Provinces, was still essentially military. Since 1876 a gradual- change has been effected. In Shingking the Military Governor has been invested with the powers of a Governor-General, the Civil Governor with those of a SUn Fu ; a new Intendancy, that of the Marches or Eastern Border ^ j{} JJ, XXXIV FURTHER ADDENDA AUD CORRIGENDA. has been established, and a prefect rules at Gh^ang-t^u ^ |, (instead of a Siibprefect) with several recently established Districts under him. In 1882 the reorganisation of Kirin commenced. The High Authorities remain for the present military, but an Intendancy has been established at Kirin, comprising one prefecture, several departments and districts and four independent subprefectures (at Pedne, Ch'ang-ch^un, Pin-chou and Wu-ch'ang). The remodelling of Hehlungkiang is under consideration but the details have not yet been published in the Peking Gazette. The recovery to Chinese rule of the New Dominion by the late Tso Tsung-t*ang has been followed, after an interval of several years, by a change in the mode of government, similar to the modifications in the Manchurian regime. In 1884 the Administrator of the New Dominion, Liu Chin-t^ang gij ^ ^, was gazetted Governor of Kansuh (a province which previously had been under the direct control of a Governor- General) and the New Dominion. At the same time a Provincial Treasurer was appointed and the Commander-in-Chief at Urumtsi was transferred to a similar post in the new province. Up to the present no Provincial Judge has been appointed. The other high provincial officials are a Brigade- General at Aksu ; a Taotai at the same town with jurisdiction over three independent Subprefectures and one independent Department with several new Districts ; and a Taotai at Kashgar with jurisdiction over two independent Subprefectures, three in- dependent Departments and sundry Districts. Lately steps in the direction of reorganisation have been taken in Formosa. Up till now a simple Intendancy dependent on Fuhkien, it is now proposed to change the status of the island to that of a separate province. The post of Govenor of Fuhkien will be abolished, the duties of Governorship devolving on the Governor-General of Min-cheh, who will be thus assimilated to the Viceroys of Ssuch'uan and Chihli. The present Governor of Fuhkien will be Governor of T^aiwan, and will reside in Formosa FURTHER ADDENDA AND CORRIGENDA. XXXV for six months in each year. Such at least is the present arrangement, but it is probable he will be required eventually to pass his whole time there. His provincial capital is yet to be built, at a point midway between Chia-yi and Chang-hua ; in the meanwhile T'ai-pei Fu (Bangka) will serve temporarily as the seat of government. His provincial staff will consist of a Treasurer (a new post), a Taotai at T^ai-pei, who will also be Superintendent of Customs, a Taotai at T'ai-wan Fu, who will be at the same time Provincial Judge and Director of Postal Communications, Brigade- Generals at the Pescadores, T^ai-wan and T'ai-pei, Prefects at T*ai-wan, T'ai-pei, Chang-hua and Pilam and several Department Magistrates, Subprefects and District Magistrates besides those already existing. The opening of the southern borders of Kuangsi to French trade is likely to require the introduction of certain administrative changes, but so far these have only been hinted at. The British conquest of Burma cannot fail to entail similar consequences in the immediate future. Another important result of the late Franco-Chinese war was the institution in 1885 of a new Board at Peking styled the Hai Pu f^ fig, or Admiralty, with the Emperor's father, the Prince of Chun, as chief. The staff will probably be on much the same model as that offered by the original Six Boards, but full details are still wanting. It is no doubt in connection with the general scheme of naval reorganisation that the Brigade-General hitherto stationed at Yang-chiang T'ing in Kwangtung has been transferred [June, 1886] to the port of Pakhoi. This official's command, as that of his colleague at Kao-chou Fu, in the same province, is now naval instead of military. XXXVl FURTHER ADDEin)A AND CORRIGENDA. NOTES ON SUNDRY OFFICIAL POSTS. The Central Government. Thongh not mentioned in the " Chinese Government," each of the Six Boards and several of the minor departments (such as the Mongolian Superintendency, the College of Imperial Physicians, the Courts of Sacrificial Worship, Banqueting and State Ceremonial) would appear to be normally provided with a Supervisor [||| 3 ^ ^ -i^ Hf]* Practically these posts are seldom all filled. For instance, in 1885 there were such Supervisors over the Boards of Civil Office, Revenue and Works, while the Boards of Ceremonies, War and Punishments had none. Precedence amono Metropolitan Officials. There appears to be no written law regulating precedence among the higher posts at Peking, but by observing the course of promotion in the pages of the Gazette, the following scale has been elaborated and may be, considered fairly accurate. 1. Comptroller-General, Civil Office. 2. do. do. Works. 3. do. do. Mongolian Superintendency. 4. President, Civil Office. 5. do. Revenue. 6. do. Rites. 7. do. War. 8. do. Punishments. 9. do. Works. 10. do. Mongolian Superintendency. 11. do. Censorate. 12. Senior Vice-president, Civil Office. 13. Junior do. do. 14. Senior do. Revenue. 15. Senior Yice-preftident^ Bites. 16. do. do. War. 17. do. do. Punishments. 18. Junior do. Bevenoe. 19« do. do. mtes. 20. do. do. Punishments. 21. Senior do. Works. 22. Supervisor, Instruction. 23. Senior Vice-president, Mongolian Superintendency. 24. Junior do. Works. 25. Senior do. Censorate. 26. President, Imperial Clan Court. 27. Junior Vice-president, War. 28. do. do. Mongolian Superintendency. 29. Junior Vice-president, Censorate. 30. Director, Office of Transmission. 31. do. Court of Revision. 32. do. Court of Sacrificial Worship. 33. . do. Court of the Imperial Stud* 34. do. Banqueting Court. 35. do. Court of State Ceremonial. 36. Deputy Supervisor, Instruction. 37-42. Subdirectors in the same order o^ tlie Directors given above. Duplication of Posts. The posts of President, Vice-presidents Senior and Junior, and (^ Senior and Junior Censors in the Six Boards, are held in duplicate, one incumbent being Manchu or Mongol and the other a Chinese or Chinese Bannerman; such posts are consequently distinguished as Manchu appointments m ^ and Chinese appointments ^ jj^. As a rule Chinese Bannermen are eligible for the Chinese ap- pointments only, but'tbey are sometimes found occupying aMonohu XXXVlll FURTfiBR ADDENDA AND CORRIGfiNDA. post It appears to be in such cases essential that the Bannerman's name should be on the Manchu pattern. Thus ^ fb, a Chinese Banuerman who in the Manchu style uses only his ming ig? would be eligible where ^ jg, also a Bannermen but called by both his orignial hsing fj^j Haily and his mingy T^ung^ would be debarred. The same duplication of posts prevails in the other departments of government with two exceptions, viz., the Mongolian Super- intendency, officered exclusively by Manchus and Mongols, and the College of Imperial Physicians, in which the officials are all Chinese, and almost invariably natives of Peking. Supernumerary Vice-president. There is attached to the Mongolian Superintendency a Supernumerary Vice-president [ (K ^ f^ J^ ] not mentioned by Mayers. He is always a Mongol prince. Mongolia, Turkestan and Thibet. Previous to the recent reorganisation of the new Dominion and its partial incorporation in Kansuh, the administration of the government in Mongolia and Turkestan was reserved for members of the eight Banners. The only exceptions were the Administrator of the new Dominion, the Commander-in-Chief at Urumtsi, and the Brigade-General at Hi. The Eight Banners. There is no published information, accessible to the public, on the personnel of the Banner Corps, except that the Red Book notes the fact whenever a high Peking official happens to be Captain-General, Lieutenant-General, or Deputy Lieutenant- General of a Banner. Appointments to these commands are, however, usually notified in the Gazette, and by diligent study of this periodical from FUUTHER ADDENDA AND COKBIGBNDA. XXXIX (lay to day, it is possible after a few years to form a tolerably accurate table of the incumbents of Banner commands* The following rules seem to hold good for posts in the Banner organisation : 1. — Bannermen only are eligible. 2. — Any Bannerman is eligible for any post; that is to say, a Manchu may be in command of a Mongol or Chinese Banner or vice versa, 3. — But a Bannerman is seemingly never appointed to command the Banner to which he himself belongs. For instance, a Manchu of the Plain white Banner might command the Yellow or the Bordered white, but never the Plain white corps. In this connection a curious fact may be chronicled. Ch'ung-yi^3|^ (distinguished as the only Bannerman who ever attained the distinction of Chuang Yuan ^ %) whose daughter was selected to be T^ung-Chih's Empress, was by birth a Mongol, but on becoming the father-in-law of the Emperor, was trans- ferred to a Manchu Banner. It is not impossible that this expedient was adopted in order that T^ung-chih's consort might be nominally of his own race. A peculiarity in connection with Chinese Bannermen is noticed above under the head of '' Duplication of Posts." Provincial Authorities. With three exceptions all such official posts as are properly speaking provincial (as opposed to certain special appointments held directly under the Crown) are open to Chinese and Bannermen alike. The three exceptions are the position of Commander-in- Chief J§ '^j whether naval or military, always filled by a Chinese, and of Tartar General and Deputy Lieutenant-General, invariably held by Bannermen. As regards Brigade-Qenerals |t ^ it is the rule that they should be Chinese, but the rule is not hard and fast. For instance, in 1879 the Chao-t^ung (Yunnan) and Chungking (Ssuch'uan) 3^1 V^fa^rS&fi ADDENDA AND OORBIGSNDA. 60iiimaiids were in the hands of Manchus. The Brigade-Generals at Yung-p*ing 'Fu (Ma-lan Ch6n) and Yi Ohou, in Chihli, seem to be invariably Bannermen ; and such was also the ease, at least until lately, at Kashgar in Turkestan. In the matter of the special appointments held directly under the Crown, viz., the Superintendents of the Hunting-Grounds lit Jehol ; of Silk Manufactures in Kiangsu and Chehkiang ; of Customs at Kalgan (Chihli), Huai-an (Kiangsu), Sha-hu-k^ou (Shan^si), and Canton, the incumbents always belong to a Banner Corps and are generally Chinese Bannermen. • Memorialising the Throne. In the old days the privilege of directly addressing the Throne extended even to Prefects. At the present time it has been much curtiiiled. In the provinces it ceases among civilians with the Judicial Commissioner, and among military officials with the Brigade- General. There is an apparent exception in the case of theTaotai of Taiwan, but he owes the privilege to the circumstance that he holds brevet rank as Judge, and is moreover ex officio Literary Chancellor for Formosa. The only cases in which he may avail himself of the right appear to be when announcing his assumption of office or reporting on the provincial examinations. Similarly Brigade-Generals memorialise only when notifying arrival at a new post. When addressing the Throne, Chinese speak of themselves as "ministers" g, Bannermen as "slaves" jj[ ;^. But there are exceptions to both these rules. Military officials of whatever race now use the term jjjf ;J^, though formerly the same distinction existed among military men as among civilians. Among Manchus, Princes of the Blood use E not jJK ^ • ALPHABimCAL INDEX. AO mm^ CHA CH'A CHAN CH'AN No. 563 11 39a 537, 604 320 72 312 189 595 221 220 563 CHANG CH'ANG :g£ CHAO Mm ffilJf No, 585 598 602 189 75 202 88 598 133, 152, 517, 541 9 439 338 338 32 40 296 296 827 333 xlii ALPHABETICAL INDEX. CH^AO CHE mm Via CH«E CHf: CH'f; ■ GflftN No. 454 473 456 341 114 343 330 273 273 284 281 289 484 300 506 507 456 596 182 25 439 441 CinfcNG mm pa IE- CH'ENG mfm CHIH mm fd^tkrb 111 m-^m^n CHO No. 479 305 281, 289 App. 1 App. 1 504 115 163 272 456 288 456 506 357 359 371 73 325 284 272 379 App. 1 182 4^W 577, 594 ALPHABETICAL INDEX. xliii CHOW No. CH'UNG No. mn 286 M&mm 472 mmm 286 MrIII 285 CH'WAN i^l^l 285 «» 477 CHU ili?9m:k^ 172 CHWANG ±igk 166 lESI 227, 292 »§ 452 ±* 65, 166 tKiC 474 ±^ 1 mi^mm 597 FAR f&i^.mm 182 &w 417 ai 587 ^'■^mm 182 • ^m:k^ 565 FAN CH'UH #J^ 565 ffi# 477, App. 1 583 477 CH'UN ff^ffi t^ 276 225 223 275 275 182 CHUNG • '¥m 147 FANG '¥B:k^ 456 » ^ tn Aju ^ ^ ^^ 'i'm 472 150 +S 2 *f6 2V5 4>«II4*« 273, 453 148 149 272 481 344 372 423, 430 +«« 272 +» 576 FEI +»*^ 456 +^ 135 % 6 xliv ALPHABSnCAI. IKDEX. Ff:N FfiNG Mm FU mmmm MB giJIB giJH gii^ glllPiMl gij!l No. 387 280 456 456 233 88 456 456 27 21 22 28 542 603 338 344 480 187 442 480 471 340 384 164- 58 536 472 334 606 370,381,427 306 442 F\J—eont g!l^^ mmm FUH HA ^mti% HAI No. 336 480 448 353, 378 15 56,340,369 339, 368 471 469 26 274 439 274 274 290 m^ 16 tSSM 306 numm 306 tmrnk 305 msL 305 3a 473 563 282 324 327 ALPHABETICAL INDEX. xl HAN No. HIEN 1 No. WtpK 201 mm 395, 544 379 NlMWi 607 m App. 1 ^mm 182 HIA fi$)^ 291 ^k^ 42 TSit 379 mk^ 44 « « HING HIANG 45 467 412 ffm 157 458 259 till IE 411 HIOH HIAO f mm 323 miE 258, 304 mmm 389,431,545 mm 257 mm^m 383 m-k 323 mm 456 mu 323 mm 472 mm:biE 478 HO • %%S»JE 173 HIEH ft«t«3^ 174 ftjiai 14 I^^.IH 266 mtms. 17 raft 439 m\m 318 l&m 136 \iid( 318 l&m-^^ 540 nu 326, 439 i&m 428 mim^mt 326 i&»&^ 175, 245 ^m^^ 561 HOW i&m:km± 136 ts-^ 442 m 455 1S1»« 573 ^W9t App. 1 nsi 352 nLm:k^ 106 J VI ALPHABETICAL IIUD&X. HU HUN HUNG t«tt# HWA 4bm HWAN tfi;$^ HWANG Im9 No. 391* 397 398 396 34 413 154 564 589 387 467 231 564 30 564 597 458 29 61 2 10 4 1 3 1 11 HWO HWUI MR 1 JEN «B JU A JUH M« JUNG No. 407 78 467, 473 182 557 . App. 1 198 71 456 563 565 App. 1 580 456 456 484 456 ALPHABETIOAL QfSKC. xJtii EA K'A •^m KAI K'AN KAO K'AO WW TffiS, mm No. 567 567 583 600 517 328 550 588 456 470 182 467 609 45a 610 425 135 143 EI mnmf irns Ka 9m» KIAH ¥«l KIANG 98 KIAO EIEI No. 188 418 164 455 456 547 383 581 4'98 472 303 305 346 472 xlviii ALPHABETICAL INDEX. KIEN £^ Itftii K'lEN ^m KIN K'lN fifths KING 8M No. 321 209 262 251 263, 264 484 247, App. 1 280 455 339 411 334 589 585 260 K'ING m KIOH ftll ftH KIU K'O m^ K'OW KU 339 232 59, 194, 295 295 472 No. 77 196, 232 455 30 499 200 348 456 517 467, App. 1 549 mist^i. 379 20 13 K'U Mm 297 297 ALFHABETIOAL INDEX. xlix Ktr MA kOan SUt Kt^N KUNG s± mA 'SB No. 472, App, 1 473 App. 1 133 133 440 282 457 182 279 550 281 41 43 281 471, App. 1 473 158 21-24, 455 12, 13 387 466 456 221 223 226 142 225 K'UNG KWAN tin mm KWANG KWBI JIA KWOH a £11 a# No. 214 460 60 84 App. 347 82 541 261 248 280 317 324 112 230 456 67 5 8 75 215 2 247 I LA LAN LANG LAO «9 LI at LIANG mm AX*rKAKRI0AL IHOSZ. No. TiTFiN No. 58i ftltt 276 mm 294 liH 452 464 LIN 98 mm& 470 mm 470 168 LING 572 ^ 289 f[^iK»*e 92 fRW:k^ 559 mm 391,494,546 329 mm 439 mm 459 mSttBlif 419 saiiK 267 282 an 585 183 548 LIU 57 548 :^m 188 282 5?;» 247 App. 1 ets 210 287, 345 153 LO 155 App. 1 mm LUH 329 329 274 278 9Ln& 393 283 mm 47t 566 m» 439 278 m9 439 LUN «« LUNG LWAN MA i^X MfJN m6ng MI MIAO ar^ MIN ALPHABBXriCAL INDfiX. No. 387 472 111 110 392, 544 358 535 563 488 329 MING MD (tk MUH ^W NA NAN HI 154 599 NGAN li No. 587 289 236 264 548 538 455, App. 1 455 247 329 152 259 152 88 557 334 456 267 469 468 lii ALPHABETIOAL INDEX. NG^H mm y NGfiN NIEH 9k^ NO NUI No. 451 588 15 455 471 App. 1 467 455 App. 1 276 276 564, 587 151 83 83 379 482 134 147 143 145 144 146 NUNG 9k^ o PA PAH AM PAI fill PAN PANG No. 154 517 547 587 465 448 456 23 (note) 379 471 329 388 560 611 585 561, 565 351 475 ALPHABETICAL INDEX. liii PAO PEH i&ft I fd3S p6n PI mm p'l PIEH SdiK PIEN nil No. 457 363 364 108 182 App. 1 36, 379 37 38 595 337 455 563 182 157 247 312 283, 285 208 PIH mm 181 181 P'lN m & 7 App. 1 PING 343 280 156 FING nm POH 1f± PU No. ^m^ 275 ^#3ge. 564 i$#Mj$ 167 urn 160, 273 ^u 161, 274 %^Bik 169 u^^^ 162 n^^n 283 us 294 ^mm^ 348 ^mm 347 ^•sm 354 199 240, 252 Uv ALPHABBTIOAIi INDXX. PUH SA SAN EM mil s6n sMg ftJE No. 23 24 564 517 283 472 79 143 182 142 App. 2 461 292 85 284 94 210 593 494 495 493 492 SHA SHAN Ill:g ttli mm SHANG ± SHAO No. 590 612 589 491 279 496 497 160 1 379 86 414 458 457 570 563 568 222 294 141 197, 233 142 140 250 162 162 162 AXiPHABBSCICAL IMDKK. Iv SBAO—cont. No. *pmm 162 ^m 162 Pmi6 162 iP^ 222, 294 ^m 294 vs 439 mm SfilB nmm± nmm± mm mmM»M 583 387 454 28, 454 455 10,39 App. 1 App. 1 9 206 204 161 206 203 97 90 95 96 189 574 76 415 236 239 81 SHfeNG jnB«T« SHIH ii'& SHOU 1km fit tff SHU mm Wot MfS,mJSi SHUEI No. 469, App. 1 466 96, 547 150 456 446 446 439 289 181 181 491 210 210 237 101 282 158 439 435 314 316 Ivi «■ SIAO SIEN mm SIH «fd SIN ALPHABETICAL INDEX. SHWANG No. SIU 1 No. 1 1 1 1 App. 2 462 Htm 469 456 456 207 SI so V 2 157 166 I 1 J3f su 327, 439 557 STANG illiii=^'iit 564 135 • • SU ^IBE SUAN 235 585 418 ma^m 332 200 &^n:km 315 133 sa^ 456 Jtttftil 331 i ] 456 SUI 329 ^R^^r ^RlW^ 592 IRX^ 471 StTN 557 mm 272, 274 mm 293 )i«e« 348 mm 306 358 ^ 1 439 ALPHABETICAL INDBX. Ivii SZE No. TA— con*. No \sRmm 256 :km 441 mwt 548 ^mm 479 IS^tiill^lBE 180 *F 289 i>9§$tl^fll:^1il 179 :k^ 396 m 439 ^%ik 426 m» 305 ^m± 135 nB^stB^ 224 iziim 200 m-^ 152,166,343 :kmi& 162 mjM 422 m3$ 575 mm 306 ^li^JlM 585 mm 171 ^^MH 605 m« 168, 182 n^ 375 mm 250 mm^ 33 T'AH mm mm&^ 246 176 m^m 539 mm 170, 302 TAI mm 152 ■rffc^k^h JiU «* 579 Mn 579 TA #a 213 *a 585 T'AI *i* 479 V .■■&. m *ffA 232 *«# 228 *A 280 ±n 138 ^m^n 188 ±m 247 :kMn 290 ±ni^ 268 :km^ 195 *« 139 :kmm 232 *«# 229 ^mm 232 *A 208 *^« 249 ±m 137 ^mm 162 ±'^ 281 *«^ 162 ik^ 162 :km^ 162 *^ 10 ikmm 162 ia^^p^ 142 :km 472 ^« 538 :k0 443 ^Ht 550 hiH ALPEULBXnOiU:. INDXX. TAN T'AN mm TANG fUMSt T'ANG TAO T]6h TfeNG SfHB No. App. 2 476 1 182 182 165 162 64 189, 280 502 503 501 5G0 280 608 608 456 456 T6NG IVMlle Tl T'l TIAO ISM TIEH m^ T'lEH No. 48» App. 1 564,578 11 m^ 190 %m 182 HM 150,216,485 vbW 309 iSkm 439 m-k 440 m^ 440 &nmm 323 H^^PI 347 llt:^ 135 464 564, 578 28, 46-54 ALPHABETICAL INDEX. \ix TIEN No. TU— cow/. 1 No. 212, 253 35 miSL { 1 380, 548. 549, 551' #(& 294 m^% 74 JIH 241, 254 ^m 274 ITS 467, 473 irii^m 279 J «i^«# 323 «flm 278 ■ T'lEN «M 439 5^^ 1 T'U 182 TING * - • - ±w 328 ^J* 582 jLw^ 328 T 547 ±jfif 328 T« ' App. 1 328 ^ ±SI 329 T'ING ( TUR mm 196 MtmiT 242 TO : TUI $ll^£ 18 l^HM^ 19 »»t 490 Hn 439, 557 TU - TUNG M^^ 184 mm 277 ^*^TrW 583 mm 445 $@ 135 m^M 189 «» 2, 10 m* 298 «Hig 365 mmm 298 ncim 116 mm 445 ft^ 468 mma 200 d^i^Ht 601 Ix ALPHABETICAL INDEX. T'UNG No. TSANG JNo. jitt^ 190 m^ 587 ^^mn 191 mmf^mm 192 m$:^^ 456 TS'ANG mm:k^ 456 J» K^ ▲A^i*^ V^ • mm 283 t^ 362 »isr:A:e 152 301 i&^lftJS 279 ASl ^ ^ V^ m^t 481 M^ 282, 334 mm±\iik 477 TS'AO }f^ 439 TSAI \%mmm 327 ffJ» 569 ^49 135 TSf:NG mm 538 USE A 589 «^ 469 II 455-6 TSAN TSI «1 244 226 mm 591 601 mi^w^ 424 TS'AN ^IS 249 «« 295 0^}^ 443 TSIANG ^P App. 1 ( 367, 426, 0Vk 193 mm. ] 456, 552, • «m 543 - (557 ?&# 564 *«*E f 553-4-5 t 558 TSIEH ^31 443 ^ii« 182 ALPHABETICAL INDfiX. Ixi TS'IEN ^^ TSIN ll± m±mk TS'IN TSING TSIOH ftiS TSO 2EW No, 433 405 403 402 401 107 335 447 447 182 473, App. 477 476 100 91 11, 537 411 454 223 225 187 197 TS'0AN ms TStTN ^n TSUNG TSO— oon<. No. ifrMM 264 /lrM1t9 361 &Mn»mm 402 &mmfk 349 &^^ 199 &w&i 161 &^m 198 &m 291 &»mA 185 &m 322 £« 288 mm 387,429,544 ^H/k 585, 588 £«tt 362 TSOU ^9r« 109 TSU &ik 255 mm 185 mm^ 601 «ff:X:S 63, 420 IB^ 441 msftn 152 153 468 Ixii ALPHABETICAL INDEX. TSUNG— oon^ ma mm mm m TS'UNG TSWAN m& TSZE TS'ZE MA No. 562 150 341», 441 272-3 408 218 447 55 55 564 45a 232 29 99 360 App. 1 150, 216 455 456 284 155 243 458 URH r,a*A WAI WAN WANG ^M £ffi WEI No. 477 456 282 291 508 379 486 483 516 487 450 449 31 152 11 sjtasitt App. 1 518 327, 439 436, 548 438 437 66 390, 432 AlFRABETIOAL INDKZ. Ixm WEI— cone. mmmwst wu i^-X* Bmn± YANG YEH No. 4G0 355 404 102 38(> App. 1 135 182 456 273 323 584 178 87 135 182 182 273 189 342 211 265 200, 231 394 571 YEN YEO mm YIH %H^ -a* A No. 505 182 313 280 311 312 277 225 223 187 264 361 99 164 198 294 186 402 349 376 377 378 444 444 471 289 319 409,421,438 350 476 456 hdv ALPEABKTIOAL INDEX. YIN liliJEllS YING YOH YtJ No. 506 App. 1 App. 1 68 190 491 385 382 439 80 410, 452 273 159 177 89 271 247 189 184 105 104 103 YtTAN Y0EH YtTH m,n YtTN YUNG No. 88, 416 585 164 491 270 269 mm 308 mm 327 mm 310 mm 277 ^1^ 307 mmm 455 mmm 113 ^ 324 329 473 55 439 MANUAL OF CHINESE TITLES. PART I.-THE IMPERIAL COURT «^ 1 . — Hwang Ti ^ ^. — The Emperor. Ordinary designation, Hwang Shang ^ Jl ; Shang J^, Title of respect, T'ien Tsze 55 •?, the Son of Heaven. Popular appellation, Tang-kin Fo Yeh § ^ ^1^, the Buddha of the present day. Also Chu Tsze ^ •^, Le. the Master, or Lord; and, in adulatory addresses, Wan Sui Yeh M 31 Mi ^'*^* Lord of Ten Thousand years. 2. — Hwang How ^ jg. — The Empress. Lit designation, ^ Chung Kung tf" §; or when two consorts of equal rank exia^t together, as in recent times, Tung Kung }|[ flf and Si Kung |f § with reference to the *' Eastern" and "Western" divisions of the Palace allotted to their use. Title of respect, Kwoh Mu 3 ^^ ^^ "Mother of the State." 3. — Hwang T^ai How ^ Jjj jg. — ^An Empress Dowager. 4. — Hwang Kwei Fei ^ Jf jfi. — Secondary Consort (Con- cubine) of the first rank. Concubines of the second rank may from time to time be advanced, by imperial favour, to this grade, and from the first rank a secondary consort may be raised to the degree of Hwang How or Empress Consort. 5. — KwBi Fei ;ft jfi. — Concubine of the second rank. 6. — Fei ^. — Concubine of the third rank. 7. — P*iN jK* — Concubine of the fourth rank. (This character is also read pin). 8. — Kwei Jen j|; A« — Concubine of the fifth rank. 2 PART I.— THE IMPERIAL COURT. 9.— Ta Ying fg m and Chiang Tsai ^ ;gg.— Female atten- dants of the Emperor. These may be elevated to the rank of Kwei JSn. Beneath them, again, is a class of Serving Women, or She Nu m 35c> ^^^ *r® recruited by annual drafts from the families appertaining to the Imperial Household, and who serve for a term of years within the Palace. 10.— T^Ai TszB :fe ^.— The Heir Apparent. Also called Slie Tsze f^ -J. Lit. des. Hwang ch'u fi^, and Tung Kung ^^^ 1 1 . — Hwang Tsze ^ ^. — Princes. The sons of an Emperor of the present dynasty are known simply as A^-ho P9 9^ ^ render- ing of the Manchu word ag^h^ unless when designated by the princely rank bestowed upon them, such as TbHu Wang ^ J, or lower dignities. Lit. des. Wang Ti 1 1^, or simply TL 12. — Kung Chu^^. — Princess Imperial; daughter of an Emperor. — See the following ranks: 13. — Ku-LUN Kung-Chu @ iH ^ ^. — Princess Imperial of the first rank (daughter of an Empress consort). From the Manchu word jrwrun, =the Chinese Kwoh or State. 14.— Ho-SHBH Kung Chu ft ^ ^ i. — Princess Imperial of the second rank (daughter of an inferior consort). 1 5. — Ngeh Fu )^ 1^. — Husband of an Imperial princess. In former dynasties, this position was designated Fu Ma H^ j^. 1 6. — Fu TsiN ^ ^. — Princess Consort (wife of an Imperial Prince). Hereditary Imperial Nobility: The titles conferred on members of the Imperial House of the present dynasty are of twelve degrees. Imperial princes usually receive patents of the first or second order on arriving at manhood, and their sons are invested with the third degree of ranL Titles of the same degrees are also conferred. on the princes and chieftains of the various Mongol tribes. They are as follows : 1 7.— i. Ho-SHEH Ts'm Wang ft ^ ^ I.— Prince of the 1st order. 18.— ii. To-LO KuN Wang $ J| IB I-— Prince of the 2nd order. PART I, — THE niPEBUL COUBT. 8 ■ 1 9.— 111. To-LO Pbi-lbh $M R Hf.— 5et-teA, or Prince of the 3rd order. 20.— iv. Ku-SHAN* Pei-Tszb S |I| K ^^—Bei-tsze, or Prince of the 4th order. 21. — V. Fbng-ngen Chbn Kwoh Kunq $ ^S* i| B &* — Imperial Duke of the first degree. 22.— vi. Fbng-ngen Fu Kwoh Kung |1 ,B M H &•— Imperial Duke of the second degree. 23. — vii. Pu-JUH Pah FENf Chen Kwoh Kung /p A A ^ ^ B &• — Imperial Duke of the third degree. 24.— viii. Pu-JUH Pah Fen Fu Kwoh Kung ^ A A ^ jm B &' — Imperial Duke of the fourth decrree. 25.— ix. Chen Kwoh Tstang Kun H B ^ 'J[.— Noble of the Imperial lineafje, ninth in line of descent. 26.— X. Fu Kwoh Tsiang Kun H B W 3?.— Noble of the Imperial lineage, tenth in line of descent. 27.— xi. Feng Kwoh Tsiang Kun $ B SV 5?.— Noble of the Imperial lineage, eleventh in line of descent 28.— xii. Feng-ngen Tsiang KtJN $ ,f, ^ gt.— Noble of the Imperial lineage, twelfth in line of descent. The titles given according to the above list are to some extent compounded of Manchu words. Thus, ho-shSh (originally signifying a banner) denotes one of the four divisions of the army or State ; and bd-Uh has the signification of commander or leader. The titles conferred in any rank are transmitted in a diminuendo scale, a bei~l4li*8 son becoming a bei^taze^ and so on, until the * Ku-shan represents the Manchu word Ku-9ai^ gignif jing Banner. t The A ^ Pfih F^/h or Eight privileged ranks date from the reign T'ien Ming (A.D. 1616-1626), when, before the entry of the Manchus into China, eight princes, entitled Ho-shgh Bei-16h, were formed into a military Council of State. They were invested with an equality of rank and dignity, and they hence received the designation of the *' eight parti tioners." When the order of precedence among the princes and nobility of t^e Imperial lineage came subsequently to be determined, a line of distinction was drawn at the sixth rank as above mentioned. The princes and nobles who were classed as on a par with the ** eight partitioners ** had the right of access to the Court on all State occasions. Those below the sixth rank simply took rank in their respective banners. (See Ta T^ing Swei Tien,) ^pn ofja .ijioble of ^el^h degree ^^pif IS ©o lopger te the inheritor of a title. An es^oeptio.n to this rule f^^!^ ho^srev^r in the ,cafie of such titles as are conferred " with the right of i^l\er;^nce fpr e\;er "-r- She H wang tH ^ 11:^^^ ^^d particularly in t^e case of the Eight Chief Princely Houses, the descendants of the Princes who served in effecting the co^qi;^Sit of Northern China. These are familiarly designated The Iro^-cappe^ Princps — Pieh Mao-Uze ^^nff ^ ♦! ^ J. {See Nqs. 46 to 54.) 29. — TsuNG Spi^ ^ ^, — Iif^pef'ial Cfapsmian ; a descendant of tlj^e acknowledged foj^nder of jlie reignjng Manqhu dynasty, Hien Tsu, A.D. 1583-1615. The Taung^aliih ^re entitled to the dis- tinction of wearing a yellow girdle, or Hwp.iig Tai-taze 3t 'Sf "?» whence this epithet has come to be used as a synonym of the rank itself Individuals who have been degraded for misconduct from the rank of Tsung-shih ^ear a red girdle, and are consequently styled Hung Tai-tsze {see behw,) 30. — KiOH Lo H JK* — Gioro, or collat^al relative of the Imperial house, claiming descent from its early ancestry.* The Gioro wear a red girdle, and are consequently designated, in fami- liar parlance, as Hung Tai-tsze ^^ ^. 31. — Wang Fd J jgf. — Establishment (Palace) of Princes OF THE ImPEEIAL LiNEAGE. 32. — Chang She ^ £. — Kecorder, or Bemembraneer; 3 af . 33. — 8zE I-chaNg % fl ^. — Major-domo ; 4 a. 34.— Hu Wei g| ^.—Officer of the Body Guard ; of four degrees of rank, from 3 b to 5 b. 35.— Tien I Jf^ ^. — Assistant Major-domo; of four degrees of rank, from 4 b to 8 b. . • For fuller particulars relating to the titles and designations of the Chinese Emperors and their kindred, see the writer's article on the *' Chinese Imperial Family" appended to *< Translations of the PeUng Gazette for 1875." Shanghai, 1876. t Here and elsewhere throaghout the following pages an officiaVs rank is in- dicated by an Arabic numeral, followed by " a " or " b," according as he is of the higher or lower grade of the said rank. Thus, 3 a implies that a Remembrancer is of the higher grade of the third rank. PAET I.— THB IMPBRUL COUBT. 6 36— Pao I Q^.— (Bo-i*) Bondservant; Serf.. 37.— Pao I Ts'an-ling ^ ifS ^ ^.—Colonel of the Bo-i; 5 b. 38.— Pao I Tso-ling ^ti 1£ §[•— Captain of the Bo-i; 4 b. 39.— She Tszb ft ^.— Son of an. Imperial Prince of the first degree (before receiving distinctive rank.) 40. — Chang Tsze ^ '^.'— Son of an Imperial Prince of the second degree (as above). 41 . — 'KuS Chu 15 i* — Daughter of an Imperial Prince of the first degree. 42. — HiEN Chu jj^ ^. — Do. of the second degree. 43.— KtJN KuN JU S.— Do. of the third degree. 44. — HiEN KijN |gg ^. — Do. of the fourth degree. 45. — HiABTG Ktjn Hi ^. — Daughter of an Imperial noble of the first or second degrees. 45a. — Keh K4h 4Sf Ijr- — Daughter of an Imperial Prince or noble (colloquial usage^ from the Manchu). This designation is confined to^ the five degrees above enumerated. The daughters of Imperial nobles in the lower ranks are designated Tsung Nii ^ jfc. The Eight Chief Princely Families: The following are the titles borne by the princely families to whom the right of perpetual inheritance is secured:- 46.— Li Ts'm Wang JX §i 3E.— Prince of Li. 47.— Jul Ts<iK Wang 'Sg ^ 2-— Prince of Jui. 48.— Ytj Ts'm Wang ^H % BE-— Prince of Yii. 49.— SuH Ts'iN Wang Jt jRI .—Prince of Snh. 50 Cheng Ts'm Wang 95 ]|| I.— Prince of ChSng. ♦ The Pao-i or bo-i are members of the Eight Banners (see No. 379) who are hereditary bondservants of either the Imperial or of one or other of the Princely households. They are formed into a separate organization within each banner. Some among them, designated the ** Corean pao-i" are deseen- dantB of Corean prisoners taken during the wars of the 17th oentury. 6 PART I.— THS IMPERUL COUBT. 51.— Chwang Ts*m Wang |K H I.— Prince of Chwang.* 52.— SHUN-CH^EfTG KxjN Wakg Jg ij^ fl^ 3E — Pnnce of Shun Ch^eng. 53.— K^BH K^iN KvS Wang ]£ ft flS I.— Prince of K^Sh-k^in (K^6h.ch4n).t 54.— I Ts^iN Wang fg H I.— The Prince of I. » This tide, although not one of the Eight, is also held in per- petuity. The holder descends from the Prince of I Hien, thirteenth son of the EmperoV K^ang Hi. • 55.— Tbung Jen Pu ^ A JJSf.— The Ihperial CiABf Court. This department regulates all affairs relating to the Imperial Eondred, preserves the Family Roll or Genealogical Becord, Yc Tieh ^ J9| etc. The Prince of the Imperial family who holds the presidentship of the Court is distinguished by the lit. des. Tmng K'ing ^ J^. 56. — Fu Ch^eng Jff ^.— Vice Director; 3a. 57. — Li She Kwan 3| V 1|f.— Commissary; 5a. 58.— Fu Li She Ewan g] 3 9 '^•—Assistant Commissary; 5b. 59.— King Lih jg S.— Registrar; 6a. 60.— The K*uNG Fang g ^.—Prison of the Imperial Clan Court. 61 .—The Hwang Tang Fang H jH g.— Begistry office of the Imperial Clan Court. 62;— Nui Wu Fu p^ gf /gp.— The Impeeial Household. 63.— TsuNG Kwan Ta Ch^en MHilS ^ g.— Comptroller of the Household. * All the above are princes of the first degree, and derive their descent in the direct line from sons of the two earlier founders of the reigning dynasty, T^ai Tsu and T'ai Tsung. t The above are princes of the second degree, descending from grandsons of T'ai Tsu and T<ai Tsung. PABT I.— THB IMPBEUL COUBT, 7 64. — T^ANG Lang CeuiTg jj J^ rft.— Secretary. 65. — Chu She ^ y.— Assistant Secretary. 66.— Wei Shu Chu She S K £ <f.— Deputy Assistant Secretary. Departmenta of the Hottsehold: 67.— Kwang Ch^u Szb H ^ 3.— Treasury of the Privy Purse. 68.— Yin K*u |K JIJ.- Bullion and Jewellery Vaults. 69.— Ts^ZB K<u iK J|t.— Porcelain Store. 70.— TwAN K^u IS m.— Silk Store. 71 . — I K^u jj; Jjjt. — Imperial Wardrobe. 72.— Ch^a K'u :^ Ht.— Tea Store. 73. — Chih Jan Kuh H fkM' — Manufacturing and Dyeing Department. 74.— Tu Yij Szb tf ft Sf.— Pay and Commission Office for the Household Brigade. 75. — Chang I Szb ^ §| 3. — Office of Worship, Ceremonial^ and Control of Eunuchs. Controls the sacrificial observances of the Court Has under it a large sta£P of secretaries and under- secretaries {lang-chung^ etc. etc). A sub-department is the Ewoh Fang % S^ or Fruit Office, which supplies the fruit and other offerings presented in sacrifice. 76.— Shbn Fang jjff ;^.— The Directorship of Worship (under the preceding). Has a number of grades of employes. 77. — K^iNG FbUg Szb J| Jf 3. — Pasturage Department. Manages the flocks and herds maintained for Palace use. 78. — HwEi Ki Szb. — ^ ff "3.— CoUectorate of rents for Banner property. 79.— San K*i Chwang T^ow Ch^u H ft Jffi ® i(t.— Steward's Office for Property of the Three Household Banners. 80.— Ting Tsao Sze flf |g ^.—Office of Works; with numerous sub-departments. 8: PABT I.— THE nCPBBIAL COUBT. 81 .—Seen Hing Szb <Q| jf| fj.— Judicial Department. This department takes cognizance of all cases relating to the three superior Banners. 82.— KwAN-HiAH Fan Yih Ch*u ^ ft # S *— Police department (with special control over eunuchs of the Court.) 83.— Nui San K^i ^ H Jft.— The Household Division of the Three Superior Banners {see the Eight Banners, infrd). In each of the superior Banners a certain number o{ pao-i or bondservants of the Imperial Household {see ante No. 38) are separately con- stituted for duty in this department. They furnish the force of three brigades entitled Nui Hiao £}i Ting ^ Jg Jg 5, Nui Eu Kan ring ^WtW^S, and Nui Te'ien FSng Ying H^9t^y corresponding to the corps under these designations formed from the general mass of the Banner population (see infrd). 84.— KwAN Fang Ch*u ^ g S-— The Antechamber Office. (Controls the personal attendance upon His Majesty). 85.— San Yuan H Bu*— The Three Courts (under the Imperial Household). These are as follows : 86.— Shang* Szb Yuan ± JU K.— The Palace Stud. 87.— Wu Pei Yuan % fl| ^.— The Imperial Armoury. 88.— Feng Chen Yuan ^ % ^.— The Parks and Hunting Grounds. His department has the control of the Imperial Parks such as the Nan Yuan ^ ^, commonly called the Hai Uze ^ ^j Yuan Ming YUan [g ^ H, Ch'ang C¥un Yuan fi $ ■, etc., etc. 89.— Ytj Ch^a Shan Ch^u ft| 3? Ji ft.— The Buttery of the Household. 90. — She Wei Ch^u f^ ^ ft. — The Department of the Imperial Body Guard. This department controls the affairs of the three superior Banners, which furnish the body guard of the Sovereign. 91.— Ts'iN KtjN Ying ^5gg.— The Imperial Guard. 92,— Ling She-Wbi Nui Ta Ch^en fiS ^ |B ^ :^ E-— Chamberlain of the Guards ; la. Six in all. PART I. — THE IMPERIAL COURT. 9 93.— Nui Ta Ch'en ft ^ g.— Chamberlain; lb. Six in all. Selected from among the San chili Ta ch^in (see below), or Captain- Generals of Banners. 94.— San Chih Ta Ch^en fj ^ :^ g— Assistant Cham- berlain ; 2b. No fixed number. These officers take the duty by turns of commanding the Palace Guard. 95.— She Wei Pan Ling f# ® |t M-— Captain of the Guards. 96.— She Wei Shih-chang f^ flS ff* ;g.— Lieutenant of the Guards. 97. — She Wei f^ %. — Officer of the Guards, distinguished as of the first, second, third or fourth rank, being respectively of the superior grades of the 3rd, 4th, and 5th, and inferior grade of the 5th rank. Of the 1st rank there are 60, of the second 150, of the third 270. 98. — Lan-ling She-wei ^ ^ ^ %- — Subaltern of the Guards, wearing the blue feather; 6 a. Ninety in all. 99. — Tsung-shih Shih-wei ^ ^ ^ $£. — Tmng-ahih Guards (consisting of Imperial clansmen). 100.— Ts'iN KuN HiAO % gt ;gc-— Sergeant of the Palace Guards ; 6 a- Seventy-seven in all. 101.— Shu Ts'in Kun Hiao ^ ^ S^.— Deputy Sergeant of the Palace Guards ; 8 b. Seventy in all. 102.— Wei Shu Ts'in Kun Hiao ^ ^ WL % :R.— Vice Deputy Sergeant of the Palace Guards. Seven in all. 1 03.— Yu Ts^iEN Ta Ch'en ^^ It :Jc B— Minister of Presence, or Grand Chamberlain; selected from among the Princes and Ministers of the Court. 104.— Yu Ts'ien She Wei ^ It fj^ |g.— Guards of the Antechamber. 1 05.— YiJ Ts^ieN Hing Tsow ^ ItfJ jg.- Mongolian Princes having the right of entree. 106.— How Ht Ta Ch^en ^ Jg ^ E-— Chamberlains of the rear-guard (two). 10 PART I. — ^THB IMPBBIAL COURT. 107.— Ts^iEN Yin Ta Ch^en "Uf 5|^ E-— Chamberlains of the vanguard (ten). 108.— Pao-Wbi-Pan She Wei |5 Jl |t ^ ^g.— Guard famishing the Imperial Escort. 109.— T^ow She Ch<u Hl^ ift.— Privy Cabinet Office. This department, supervised by the Ministers of the Presence, takes charge of the communications between the Sovereign and the Grand Council, when the Council is not in personal attendance upon His Majesty. It is divided into two branches, the one for documents in Manchu and Chinese, the other for Mongolian. 110.— LwAN I Wei H f| |ij5.— The Imperial Equipage Department* With numerous subdivisions. 111. — LwAN I She || m ^. — Commissioner of the Equipage Department ; 2 a. 112.— KwAN KuN She SE H ft-— Marshal of the Equipage Department; 3 a. 113. — YuN Hwei She ^ gjl ft. — Assistant Marshal do.; 4a. 114. — Che I Cheng jj§§|J£. — Controller do. do.; 5a. 115. — Cheng I Yi^ SE fli ®- — Assistant do. do.; 6a. Imperial Mausolea. 116.— Tung Si Ling yn "S K- — The following are the names of the Imperial Mausolea, situated at the " Eastern " and " Western" Hills, hence known as the Tung Si Ling: 117. — Chad Si Ling BS W I^ (East).— Mausoleum of the Consort of the Manchu sovereign T^ai Tsung (A.D. 1627-1643). 118. — HiAO Ling ^ gH (East). — Mausoleum of Emperor Shun Che (1644-1661). 119. — HiAO Tung Ling ^ % 1^ (East). — Mausoleum of Empress of Shun Che. 120. — King Ling Jj^ B| (East). — Mausoleum of Emperor K^ang Hi (1662-1722). 121. — T'Ai Ling ^ gj (West).— Mausoleum of Emperor Yung Cheng (1723-1735). PART I. — THE IMPERIAL COURT. 11 122.— T'ai Tung Ling H Ht IS (East).— Mausoleum of Empress of Yung ChSng. 1 23.— YtJ Ling ^ ^ (West).— Mausoleum of Emperor K'len Lung (1736-1795). 1 24. — Chiang Ling g ^ (West). — Mausoleum of Emperor Kia K^ing (1796-1820). 125.— Chiang Si Ling g ® K (West). — Mausoleum of Empress of Kia K*ing. 1 26. — Mu Ling H |g|{ (West). — Mausoleum of Emperor Tao Kwang (1821-1850). 127.— Mu Tung Ling JE )K SI (West).— Mausoleum of * Empress of Tao Kwang. 128.— Ting Ling 5g ^ (East).— Mausoleum of Emperor r en Fgng (1851-1861). 1 29.— T^Ai TszE Ling Jc "? 18 (East).— Mausoleum of Heir Apparent Twan Hwei, eldest son of Emperor K*ien Lung. 130. — Hwei Ling ^ ^ (East).— Mausoleum of Emperor T^ung Che (1862-1874). 131.— FuT^o YtjH Jg^PEllgf (East).— Mausoleum in course of preparation for senior Empress Regent (Empress Dowager of Hien Feng). 1 32.— P^u SiANG YiJH ^Mt& (East).— Mausoleum in course of preparation for junior Empress Regent (Empress Mother of T^ung Che). Noife. — The two mausolea which are in course of preparation for the two Empresses Regent, at a cost of six millions of taels, are known, euphemistically, by the designation Wan Nkn Ki Ti H ^ "o )fe — ^h® Happy Land for a Myriad Years. 12 PART II. — ^MBTROPOUTAN ADMINISTRATION. PART II.-METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATION. The central government of China, so far as a system of this nature is recognized in the existing institutions, is arranged with the object rather of registering and checking the action of the various provincial administrations, than with that of assuming a > direct initiative in the conduct of affairs. The empire proper is divided into eighteen provincial governments, to which are to be added the three eastern provinces, constituting the territory of Manchuria, and organized on a more or less military basis. Beyond the limits of China proper are the subject territories of Mongolia and Tibet, and the tribute-paying nations of Corea, Anam, Burmah, and Nepal. Among these, Siam was formerly also included. On various parts of the frontier and scattered over all the southern and western provinces are, furthermore, numerous tribes of aborigines, either partly or wholly uncivilized, for whose government special regulations are in force. Regulations, indeed, of the most minute and comprehensive character, are on record for the guidance of every conceivable act of administration ; and the principal function, of the central government consists in watch- ing over the execution of this system of rules. The bestowal of the higher appointments of the civil and military services, and the distribution of the superior literary degrees as reVards for proficiency in the studies upon which the entire polity of the Empire is based, comprise the remainder of the attributes reserved to the government established at Peking. The Central Govern- ment may be said to criticize rather than to control the action of the twenty-one provincial administrations, wielding, however, at all times, the power of immediate removal from his post of any official whose conduct may be found irregular or considered dangerous to the stability of the State. The following are the departments of the Central administration : 133.— The KuN Ki Ch^u g| :fi8 ft.— Council of State, or PART II. — METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATION^. 13 Grand Council (literally, Place of Plans for the Army). This department is the actual privy council of the sovereign, in whose presence its members daily transact the business of the State, at a meeting: held between the hours of 4 and 6 a.m. It is a Cabinet composed of Ministers holding other substantive offices, and who are known as Kiln Ki Ta Ch'in % ^ ^ S* Their number is undetermined ; but for many years past it has not exceeded five. A body of sixty secretaries, Chang King ^t j^, also called Siouo Kan Ki h\\ |^ IS? attends to the clerical work of the Council. The institution derives its origin from the practice instituted by the earlier emperors of the present dynasty of treating public affairs on the footing of a military council, whence the title adopted, in about the year 1730, for the council as it at present exists. The title c/iang-king (see above) corresponds to the Manchu word chan-yin^ or chan-h/in, signifying an "assistant," in either civil or military employ. 134. — The Nui Koh ^ ^. — Grand Secretariat or Imperial Chancery (literally. Inner Cabinet or Hall). This department, which, under the preceding dynasty, was the Supreme Council of the Empire, has within the last century and a half, become super- seded in active importance by the Grrand Council. It now forms the Imperial Chancery or Court of Archives, and admission to one of the six posts which constitute its superior ranks confers the highest distinction attainable by Chinese officials, although with fdncftions that a.re almost purely nominal. The most distinguished Governors-General are usually advanced to the dignity of Grand Secretary while continuing to occupy their posts away from the capital. The constitution of the office is as follows : 135. — Ta Hioh She :fc Jp j;. — Grand Secretary; la. Coll. des. Chung Pang 4» ^ ; Epist. style, Tsai Siang ^ ;fB, and Siang Kwoh ^ H. Of the four Grand Secretaries, two are Manchus and two Chinese. Each of the four is designated as Ta Hioh She of one or other of the "throne-halls" or pavilions of the Imperial palace. The names of these are as follows: Win Hwa Tien %m n-> W» Ying r«n JC 3^ 18; Ti Jin Koh « fc ®; Tung Koh % H^. 14 PART II. — METROPOLITAN ADMTi^ISTRATION. Under the Ming dynasty, the Grand Secretaries were familiarly designated Koh Lao ^^^ or Elders of the Nui Kohj whence the title rendered by the Jesuit missionaries as Colao. 136.— HiEH-PAN Ta Hioh She -g; |jf i^ J|t i.— Assistant Grand Secretary; lb. Coll. des. Chung T'ang (as above); Epist. style, Hieh K'weiy jj JK- Of this office there are two incumbents, one Manchu and one Chinese. — Honorary Titles: 137.— i. T'ai She is: ffl.— Grand Preceptor; 1 a. 1 38.— ii. T^Ai Fu ± fl|f.— Grand Tutor ; 1 a. 1 39.— iii. T'AI Pag :Jfc fi^.— Grand Guardian ; 1 a. 140. — iv Shag She aJ^ g(. — Junior Preceptor; 1 1*. 141. — V. Shag Fu >J> %. — Junior Tutor; 1 b. 142. — vi. Shag PAG.#J?flJ.— Junior Guardian; 1 l\ The above six honorary titles correspond to tbo titl(3^ oli'. six highest Ministers of State of antiquity, desi^iiated t}>' San Kung 3 & ^^^ '^^^ -^** H S51- These titles arc now seldom conferred, with the exception of No. vi. The last is especially bestowed as the (nominal) ^'Guardianship of the Heir Apparent" l^ai Tsze Shao Poo jfc •? 4^ fis* ^^ entitles the bearer to be addressed as Kung Pao § flj. 143.— Nui Kgh High She ft gg J|t J:-— Sub-Chancellor of the Grand Secretariat; 2b. Ten in all, acting as registrars of the seals of State and of certain departments of the archives; Lit. des., Koli Hio ^ %. 144.— Nui Kgh She-tuh High She ft ^ f# K il ±.— Readers of the Grand Secretariat; 4b. Six in all. They compare the texts of State papers in the Manchu and Chinese language. 145.— Nui Kgh She-tuh ft ^ ^ IS* — Assistant-Readers of the Grand Secretariat; 6 a. Nine in all. 146.— Nui Kgh Tien Tsi ft ^ JR jg.— Archivists of the Grand Secretariat ; 7a. Six in all. 1 47.— Nui Kgh Chung Shu ft ^ 4* S-— Secretary of the Grand Secretariat; 7 b; Lit. des. Chung Han ^ t|. PART II. — METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATION. 15 148 Chung Shu K^o ^ ff 5^.— The Imperial Patent Office; a sub-department of the J!f^u% Koh. 1 49.— Chung Shu K^o Chung Shu tp^^t\t ff.— Secretary of the Imperial Patent Office ; 7 b. 150.— Fang Lio Kwan jjf ^ f|.— The Military Archive Office. This department has the special duty of drawing up the records of military undertakings and achievements. It is under the supervision and control of the Grand Council (No. 133), of whom one or more of the members may hold the position of President — Tmng Ts'ai ^ ^. The other superior officers are two Manchu and two Chinese Proctors — TH THao ^ fSJ, and an equal number of Archivists — Show Chang l(j[ j|t. There are in addition three Manchu and six Chinese Compilers — Tsuan Siu ^ j^. 151.— Nui Fan Shu Fang j^ ^ tf g.— Manchu-Chinese Translation Office. Conducts the translation of State papers from Chinese into Manchu, Subject, like the Fang Lio Kwan (see above), to the Grand Council. 1 52.— TsuNG-Li KoH KwoH She Wu TamIjn HiM^M^ Igjf ^ P^. — The Yamen of Foreign Affairs. This department, like the Kiln Ki Ch'u or Grand Council, is considered not so much a separate organization, with ranks and promotion specially appertaining to itself, as a species of Cabinet formed by the admission of members of other departments of State. It owes its institution to proposals laid before the Throne by a special Council convened after the conclusion of peace in 1860, to decide upon the manner in which foreign affairs should thenceforward be conducted. In reply to the memorial presented by this Council, headed by the Prince of Hwei, a Decree was issued on the 19th January 1861, commanding the formation of a new department under the title given above. In the same decree, the Prince of Kung (brother of the Emperor Hien Feng, at that time on the throne), Kwei Liang, a senior Grand Secre- tary, and Wen Siang, a Vice-President of the Board of War, CLli^ ^^ ^^ f^f^J^) Sue "? ^ICd. Q^JC: / 16 PART II.— METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATION. were named as the constituent members of the Tamen. In the following year four additional Ministers were added to the list, and by the year 1869, successive additions had brought the number up to ten, at which it remained for a number of years, the various members consisting of Presidents and Vice-Presidents of the different Boards {see infrdj No. 153), including a majority of the members of the Grand Council. The death of Wen Siang, in May, 1876, left the Prince of Kung as the sole original member still connected with the Yamen; and in December, 1876, the YamSn became more closely than ever identified with the Grand Council, by the admission into its ranks of the two members of that body who had not previously been introduced to it Their admission raised the number of Ministers of the Yamen to eleven. They are spoken of collectively as Wang Ta Ch^in ^ ^ g — the Prince and Ministers. The departmental work of the Yamen is conducted by secretaries, Clmng King ^ Jff , who were in the first instance drafted from the staff of the Grand Council. Their ordinary official designation is sze yUan ^ ^ or sze kwan ^ ^. The six chief Secretaries, all of whom hold either substantive or expectant rank, are usually designated tsung pan ^ K|. In accordance with the scheme proposed in 1861, the office of Minis- ter Superintendent of Trade, T^ung Shang Ta Ch^en ji£ "^ ^ S^ is held at Nanking and Tientsin respectively by the Governor General of the Two Kiang provinces and the Governor General of Chihli. As Superintendents of Trade for the Northern ports (Tientsin, Newchwang, and Chefoo) and the Southern ports (including the remainder of those open to trade) respectively, these functionaries are commonly referred to as the Nan and Peh Yang Ta Ch'in ^ 4t # * E- The Six Boards. 153.— i. Li Pu Jg ^.— Board of Civil Office. Lit. des. Ta'nan Ts'ao ^ 1g. 154.-rii. Hu Pu JS ^. — Board of Eevenue. Lit. des. Nung Pu Jl gp and Min Pu Jg -gp. 155. — iii. Li Pu Jjj^ UJ* — Board of Ceremonies. Lit. des. Ts'ze Pu PI ft. PART II. — METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATIOIT. 17 156.— iv. Ping Pu ^ 1^.— Board of War. Lit. des. 157.— V. HiNG Pu }lj ^— Board of Punishments. Lit. des. PiPu^^ and Si Ts'ao W W- 1 58.— vi. KuNG Pu X IJ5.— Board of Works. Lit. des. Shuei Pu'Hii ^, 159.— YoH Pu ^ {p.— The Board of State Music, a dependency of the Board of Ceremonies. See in/rdy No. 173, etc. ^^*^^ The official constitution of each of the Six Boards {Liu Pu ^ fl5) is, with few exceptions, the same throughout. They control, each in its allotted department, the execution of that system of minute regulation for the conduct of all public affairs which has been mentioned above as the principal attribute of the Central Government The Presidents and Vice-Presidents of the Boards, in fact, with the heads of the Censorate and the Hanlin College, may be said to constitute the central administration. The following is the staif common to all the Boards : 160. — Shang Shu fj ^.—President of a Board; 1 b. Official des. Pu Pang ^ ^. Each Board has two presidents, respectively Manchu and Chinese. 161. — She Lang f^ ^. — Vice-President of a Board; 2 a. Official des. Pu YOan $5 f^. Each Board has two Manchu and two Chinese Vice-Presidents, distinguished respectively, in each class, as Senior, Tso She Lang £ ^ SS? and Junior Vice-President, Yeo She Lang 7^ ^ ^. 1 62,— Pu YtJAN Ta Ch'Sn U5 K :fc g.— Heads of Depart- ments. This generic designation embraces the Presidents of the Six Boards and of the Superior Courts. Presidents and Vice- Presidents are further described as T}ang Kwan ^ ^ or heads of departments. The following are the literary equivalents for the titles of the Presidents and Vice-Presidents of the Boards : Board of Civil Office: President, Tai Tsai ±^ ^ Vice- President, Shoo Tsai ijf ^. 18 ' PART II. — ^METEOPOLITAN ADMIKISTRATION. Board of Eevenue : President, Ta Sze T^u ;^ 'S ^- Vice- President, Shao Sze Tu >J? ^ ^. Board of Ceremonies: President, Ta Tsung Peh •Kj ^ fjQ. Vice-President, Shao Tmng Peh iJ? ^ {&• Board of War: President, Ta Sze Ma ^ % Jg§. Vice- President, Shao Sze Ma )J^ % ^. Board of Punishments: President, Ta Sze K'ow ^ Q ^. Vice-President, Shao Sze K^ow fj^ % ^. Board of Works: President, Ta Sze K^ung >^ "3 S- Vice- President, Shao Sze K'ung jj? "^ ^. 163. — Lang Chung $^ if». — Senior Secretary of a Board; 5 a. Lit. des- Cheng Lang ^ J^. 164. — Yuan Wai Lang Q ^ %. — Second-class Secretary of a Board; 5 b. Lit. des. Fa Lang glj J|^; Ki Lang ff ^. 165. — T^ANG Chu She ^ ^ :^. — Assistant Secretary of a Board; 6 a. 166. — Chu She ;J y. — Second-class Assistant Secretary of a Board. Lit. des. Chu Clieng ^ BSt? 6 a. N,B. — The four preceding ranks are very largely obtained by purchase or conferred as distinctions, without entailing more than a nominal connection with the Boards to which they relate. The Secretaries in active employment at a Board are generically described as Sze Kwan 3 '1^« 167. — Pu Sze Sze-K'u ^ ^ "^ J$.— Treasury Supervisor of a Board or Court ; 7 a. 1 68. — Sze Wu % fj.— Steward of a Board; 8 a. 1 69.— Pu Yuan K'u She $|5 ^ j$ ^.—Treasury Keeper of a Board; unclassed. 1 70. — Sze Yu % ^. — Keeper of the Prison of the Board of Punishments; 9 b. 1 71 . — Sze Tsiang "^ |S. — Overseer of Works, in the Board of Works ; 9 b. 172.— Chu Yin Kuh Ta She H pfl ^ :fc ft,— Superin- PART II. — METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATION. 19 tendent of the seal-casting department (under the Board of Ceremonies) ; unclassed. Officers of the Board of Music : 173. — Ho SnfeNG Shu Shu Chbng ft S I^ I^ jE- — Director of the Board of Music; 6 b. 1 74.— Ho SflfiNG Shu Shu Cn^feNG ft S 1^ |^ fB-— Sub- director of the do. do ; 7 b. 175. — HiEH Lu Lang fg ^ J$. — Chief Musicians ; 5 in all. 176.— SzE YoH Lang g m ®.— Band-masters; 25 in all. 177.— YoH SnfeNG m ^.—Musicians; 180 in all. 178.— Wu SHfiiNG H Ife.— Posturers ; 300 in all. 179.— SzE YiH HwEi T'UNG KwAN Ta She B Hl^ ^ H ^ ft* — Keeper of the Residence for Tributary Envoys (under the Board of Ceremonies) ; 9 a. 180.— SzE YiH HwEi T^UNG KwAN Su Pan ^ ^.— Ceremonial Usher of Tribute Missions ; 9 b. 1 81 .— PiH-T^iEH-SHE |l iKf ^.—Official Writer. The title borne by the class of Government clerks (with official status of the 7th, 8th, or 9th rank) attached to all the metropolitan departments. Lit. des. Pi/i Cheng ^ Q[. The title is a reproduction of the Manchu word bitkeshij or writer. Although nominally charged with the clerical duties of the Boards and other Government offices, the pih-t^ieh'she at the present day leave the bulk of the work of correspondence and account-keeping, etc., to be performe dby the permanent staff of hired clerks, shu-pan ff m (officially designated shu'-li ff |g), who are employed in large numbers in every public office in Peking as well as throughout the Empire. 1 82. — SUB-DBPARTMBNTS OF THE BOARDS. Each of the Six Boards is subdivided into a variety of depart- ments, a certain number of which are common to all, whilst the ftmctions of others are naturally prescribed by the special attributes of the Board itself. The following are the designations of the departments to be found in all the Boards alike: — 20 PART II. — METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATION. i. Tang Fang flf '^. — Q^neral Beoord and Registry Depart- ment. In the Board of Revenue this is divided into two offices, the Northern and Southern, each with distinct classes of business under its control. ii. Ftn Fang ;jC ^. — Copyists' Department; for the pre- paration of reports and returns to be laid before the Throne. iii. SzE WuH T^iNG ^ Igjf Igg. — Superintendency of employes and current business. iv. TuH Ts^ui So ^ fg J5f. — Control Department; for ensuring the punctual despatch of business. V. Tang Yueh Ch'u § ^ jg. — Correspondence Registration Office. The following departments are common to more than one Board: vi. KuN Su KuH ^ H ^.—Office of the Military Chest. (Boards of Revenue and of Works). vii. Ts^iEN Fah T'ang §( jjfe ^. — Coinage Department. (As above). viii. Fan Yin Ch^u ^ ^ Jg. — Provincial Perquisites Office ; issuing the maintenance allowance to members of the Board on duty. (Boards of Revenue and Punishment). The amount thus shared, under the name of ^^maintenance, or food, money," is derived from percentages on the revenue collection remitted under this head from the provincial exchequers. «*« The departmental work of each Board is, in addition, distributed among a variety of office divisions, the most important of which bear the generic designation of TsHng-li Sze {JH £ "3, to which epithets indicating either the names of the provinces appertaining to the several divisions, or the character of their special business, are prefixed. The most noteworthy of the special departments appertaining to each of the principal Boards are the following :— ix. HiEN ShSn Ch^u 3g 9 gf.—- (Board of, Revenue). PART n. — METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATION. 21 A special Court for the adjudication of suits among Manchus relating to landed property. X. San K'u Tang Fang H Jfltt tt *•— (Board of Revenue). Registry Office of the Three Treasuries. — ^These are: the Bullion Treasury, the Treasury of Silks and Satins, and the Treasury of Dye-stuffs and Stationery. xi. Wu SuAN Ts*iNG-Li SzE IC 3 jH j^ fj.— (Board of War). Office of appointments and promotions. xii. Chih Fang Ts^ing-li Sze JR JST iH £ '9.— (Board of War). General Conduct Office. Supervises the bestowal of rewards and adjudication of penal ties j the periodical scrutiny of qualifications, inspection of troops, etc. etc. xiii. Ch'I; Kia Ts^ing-li Sze :^ S It ft Q.— (Board of War). The Cavalry Remount and Postal Department. This office superintends all matters relating to the military stud. Beneath it are the following three sub-departments : — xiv. HwEi T^UNG Kwan #|^|t. — Imperial Despatch Office; superintending the transmission of the correspondence from the Provinces. XV. TsiEH Pag Ch^u ^ ^ g^. — Council Messenger's Office. xvi. T^i T^ANG H ||.— The Courier Posts. The arrangements for the transmission of Government des- patches along the lines of postroads throughout the Empire are superintended by military officials stationed at either end of each line of communication, and entitled either Chu King T^i-t^ang IK ^ ^ Hi' Superintendents of Posts residing at Peking, of whom there are sixteen, or Chu Sheng 'Pi Pang 1^ i§ H ^y Provincial Superintendents, as the case may be. Under the direction of the former are the Pao Fang ^ ]^ or offices at which the Peking Gazette is printed. xvii. Wu K^u Ts^iNG Li Sze Jg jj Jflf JJ fj.— (Board of War). Office of registration for the army and military stores, and for the direction of the military examinations. xviii. WfeN SuAN Ts^iNG Li Sze $ S i» A S-— 22 PART II. — METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATIOIT. (Board of Civil Office). Appointment and Transfer department. XIX. K'AO KuNG Ts'iNG Li SzB ^ J^ f|||t f|.— (Board of Civil Office). Department of Scrutiny; having the control over the rewards or penalties to be awarded throughout the civil service. XX. Yen FSng Ts^ing Li Szb Jjf ^ fH ft g.— (Board of Civil Office). Department of issue of patents of nobility and rank, etc 183.— Li Fan Yuan 3 flf J^.—The Mongolian Superin- tendency. This department, which has sometimes been called the Colonial Office^ is specially charged with the control of the tribes of Mongolia, including the multifarious and complicated relations with their princes and various ranks of nobles, with the affidrs of Tibet, and with the supervision of the Lamaist hierarchy in all its ramifications. Until within the present generation, it also conducted the relations of the Chinese Government with that of Bussia. Its organization is similar to that of the Six Boards (see above), with the exception that it has but one President and two Vice-Presidents. For the affairs administered by the Board, see Parts XI and XII. 184.— The Tu Ch*a Yuan |gs |g R.— The Censorate, or Court of Censors. Lit. des. Ya She T^ai Ift jfe ^. 185.— Tso Tu Yu She ^g HJ :^ i.— President of the Censorate; lb. One Manchu and one Chinese. Lit. des. Tsung Him iH JjR- 186.— Ybo Tu Yti She :& S5 ^ ft.— Associate-President of the Censorate; a title borne by Governors General of the provinces. 187.— Tso and Yeo Fu Tu Yu She 2E :& gJ|B ^ ft.— Vice-Presidents (Senior and Junior) of the Censorate; 3 a. Lit. des. Fu Hien g|J JjJ. Two of the first and four of the second rank, in each case half Manchu and half Chinese. The title of the junior rank is borne by Governors of the Provinces. 188. — Ki She Chung fj^ Tf. ^. — Supervising Censors; 5 a. These constitute the Imperial Supervisorate or Of&ce of PART II, — METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATION. 23 Scrutiny over the Six Boards, hence called Liu K^o 3?; f|. In each department there are two Chang Yin Ki She Chung jIC PP |fr ^ rfi or Keepers of the Seal, and two ordinary Supervisors. Lit des. Ta Ki Kim :^ |& t||. 189.— YtJ She ^ 4.— Censors; 5 b. Lit des. She Ya ^ :^. Coll. des. Tu Lao-yeh |0 ^ j^. There are 56 in all, distributed over 15 Tao ^ or Circuits embracing the Eighteen Provinces, beside the King Ki Tao ^ ft S, Metropolitan circuit. .To each division there are allotted two Chang Yin Yu She '}$. ^ Hi £, or Keepers of Seal, and two or more Censors, whose duty it is to inform the Sovereign upon all subjects connected with the welfare of the people and the conduct of government. In addition to the above, a certain number of the Censors are employed as Superintendents of Police for the Five Divisions of the city and suburbs of Peking, called the Wu Ch^ing jj M? ^^ "Five Cities." These are the Centre, or the environs of the Imperial Palace, and the North, South, East, and West divisions. Others of the Censors are appointed in turn to act as Supervisors of the Granaries, or Ch^a Ts'ang Yu She £ ^ ^ £• 1 90.— The T'uNG CnfeNG Sze jiljfca.— Office of Transmission. Lit. des. Yin T^ai ft ^. Tliis department had the duty, under the Ming dynasty, of opening, recording, and transmitting to the Council of State all memorials received from the provinces. At present, it takes cognizance only of the tH pin @ TfC, or memorials on routine business which are thus received. AH memorials on special business go to the Council unopened. 191. — T^UNO ChIing She Sze jH igfi; ^ %* — Commissioner of the Office of Transmission ; one Manchu and one Chinese. 192.— T^uNG CHfeNG Sze Fu She JHfc Q gll 1i-— Deputy Commissioner of the Office of Transmission; one Manchu and oq^ Chinese. 193.- T^UNG CnfiNG SzB Ts<an I ji ft €1 ^ H-— Secretaiy of the Office of Transmission; one Manchu and one Chinese* 24 PABT II. — METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATION. 194.— T^UNG Cheng Szb King Lih ^ Q|[ ^ jg |f.— Commifisary of Records of the Office of Transmission. 1 95,— The Ta Li Szr :fc g ^.— Grand Court of Revision. This department exercises a general supervision over the administra- tion of the criminal law. 1 96.— Ta Li Sze K^ing ^ 9 ^-jjip.— Director of the Grand Court of Revision; 3 a. Lit. des. Ting Tsih |g BQ. 1 97.— Ta Li Tze Shag K^ing :fc 9 # {{? Up.— Sub-Director of do. do. ; 4 a. Lit. des. Tso Ki ^ IJ. 1 98. — Tso Sze and Yeo Sze ChISng 2£ ^ ^ 5^* — Secretaries of do. do.; 6 a. Lit. des. I Sze ^ %, 199. — ^Tso and Yeo P^ing She 2£ /& ^ ^.—Assistant Secretaries of do. do.; 7 a. 200. — Note. — The three foregoing departments, colloquially classed in the phrase Jw, T^tinjr, Ta, |B( j|| ;)t;9 constitute with the Six Boards the Ta Kiu KHng "^ZJL^iOv Nine Chief Ministries of State. When the Kiu K^ing are named in decrees without mention of the Six Boards, the above combination is implied. When the "Six Boards and Nine Ministries" are specified, the Siao Km K'ing ij^ ^ jgl, are understood to be referred to. These comprise the Censorate, the Tung ChSng SzCy the Five Courts or Sze 3£ ^9 the Han Lin Yuan^ and the Kwoh Tsze Kien, 201.— The Han-Lin Yuan ^ ;^ K-— The College of Literature {Han-lin College). 202.— Chang YOan High She S|E ^ #1 i.— Chancellor of the Han-lin ; 2 b. One Manchu and one Chinese. (The post may- be filled by a Grand Secretary, or by a President or Vice-President of a Board). 203.— She Tuh High She f^ || j|( j;.— Reader of the Han Jin ; 4 b. Two are Manchu and three Chinese. 204. — She Kiang Hioh She ^ ^ ^^ j;.— Expositor of the Han-lin ; 4 b. (As above). 205.— She Tuh ^ H-— Sub-reader of the Han-lin; 5 b. (As above). PART II. — METROPOLITAK ADMINISTBATION. 25 206.— She Kianq j^ If.— Sub-Expositor of the Han-linj 5 b. (As above). Note. — ^The above classes constitute what may be called the superior hierarchy of the Han-lin College. The following are the titles bestowed upon the successful candidates at the triennial examinations of tsin^sze graduates held in the Palace, and hence called Tien Slie or Palace Examinations (See Part IX). 207.— Siu Chwan f^ ^. — Han-lin Compiler; 6 b. 208.— PiBN Siu |g j|f. — Han-lin Compiler (second class); 7 a. Lit. des. "Pai She ^ ^. 209.— KiEN T'AO It If .—Han-lin Graduate of the third degree; 7 b. 210. — Shuh-Ki She ^ "§ j:. — Han-lin Bachelor, or graduate of the lowest degree. (See Part IX, No. 473). The graduates of this class are still held bound to pursue a farther course of study, which is conducted at the Shu Chiang Kwan ^ % H^, a college devoted to this purpose, and are enabled by a subsequent examination, held by a special Commission within the Imperial palace, to attain the degrees of Pien Siu and Kien T'ao^ as above. They are then said to be Liu Kwan fj f|[, t.€., retained in the Han-lin College. Those who fail to reach the higher degrees are described as San Kwan ^ f|f, or *' released from study," and receive appointments as District Magistrates or Secretaries of Boards. 211.— Wu King Poh She £ g jf :t.— Doctor of the Han-lin degree; 8 a. A special distinction conferred upon des- cendants of the sages of antiquity, after passing the examinations at Peking. 212.— Tien Pu :^ ||.— Archivist of the Han-lin College; 8 b. Four in all. 213. — ^Tai Chad ^ ^. — Probationer of the Han-lin College; 9 b. (As above.) 214.— K^DNG MuH JL @.— Clerk of the Han-lin College (lowest grade) ; 9 b. 215.— The KwoH She Kwan B ^ If.— State Historio- grapher's Office. 26 PART IL — METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATION. This is a department of the Han-lin College, engaged in the custody and preparation of the historical archives of the dynasty. Its duties comprise the compilation of official biographies of all eminent public servants. The following are the titles of its functionaries:— 21 6. — TsuNO Ts'Ai iHl ^.—Director General. (This appoint- ment is usually held by one of the chief Ministers of State). 217.— T^i TiAO H m.— Proctor; two Manchu and two Chinese. 218. — ^TsuNG TswAN ill 0|. — Historiographer; four Manchu and six Chinese. 219.— TswAN Siu H gf.— Compiler; 34 in all. 220.— The Chan She Fu )^ 1^ jjj. — Imperial Supervisorate of Instruction. This department is specially charged with the direction of the studies of the Heir Apparent, but it has ceased for upwards of a century to exercise, even nominally, any active functions. The appointments connected with it are conferred as sinecure rewards for literary service. 221. — Chan Shb d^^. — Chief Supervisor of Instruction; 3 a. Lit. des. Kung Clian ^ j^. 222.— Shao Chan She fj^ @.— Assistant Supervisor of Instruction; 4 a. Lit. des. Shao Yin ^ ^. 223.— Tso and Yeo Ch<un Fang Shuh Tszb &:Q ^i^M ^. — Deputy Supervisor of Instruction (senior and junior rank) ; 5 a. Lit. des. Kung Shu ^ |S|. 224.— SzB King Kxjh Sibn Ma ^ fl[ ]g jJb Jg.— Groom of the Library; 5 b. 225.— Tso and Yeo Ch^un Fang Chung YtJN &:& M^ tp ^. — Secretary of the Supervisorate of Instruction ; 6 a. Lit, des. Kung Yun ^ ^. 226.— Tso and Yeo Ch^un Fang Tsan Shan H ||.— Assistant do. do. do.; 6 b. Lit. des. Kung Tsan ^ f(. 227.— Chu Pu i H,— Archivist; 7 b. PART II. — ^METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATION. 27 The Four Mxnor Courts: These are as follows: 228.— T^Ai Chiang Szb -j^ fH ^.— Court of Sacrificial Worship. 229.— T^Ai P^u Szb ±^ HI ^.-Do. of the Imperial Stud. 230.— K WANG LuH Szb % ^ ^.— Do. of Imperial Enter- tainments (or Banqueting Court). 231.— Hung Lu Szb ^ H ^.— Do. of State Ceremonial. The officials of the above-named departments, which, with the Court of Bevision (see No. 195) constitute the Wu See 3£ ^, are as follows, the titles in each case being nearly identical, but distinguished by the name of the department to which they respectively belong: — 232. — K^ING IgL — Director; 3 a (except in the Hung Lu SzBj which is 4 a). The lit designations of the various Courts are as follows: T>ai Chiang Sze^—Tsung Peh ^ffi; T^ai P^u Sze^— Ta Sze P^u ^ fi| fl; Kwang Luh Sze^—Ta Sze Shan ^ ^ Ji; Hung Luh Sze^ — Ta Hing JSn :fi fx A* Except in the case of the first of the four, the Sub- Directors (see below) have the same designations, with the character Shoo (lesser) substituted for Ta. N.B. — The Directors and Sub-Directors of the Courts are generically described as King T^ang jS( £• 233. — Shao K*ing ^p 0. — Sub-Director; 4 a and 5 a (except the Hutig Luh Sze^ which is 5 b). Lit. des. of Sub-Director of the T'ai Ch'ang Sze,—F^g Ch'ang $ ^. 234. — Szb Ch^Iing ^ ^.—Secretary of a Court; 6 a. 235.— SiJ Pan ^ igt.— Usher of the Court of State Cere- monial. 236.— Ming Tsan ql ||.— Herald of the do. do. ; 7 a. 237* — Shu ChIsng |f ]£. — Superintendent of various depart- ments of the Banqueting Court, such as the Fleshers', the Cellarage, the Game, the Spices, etc., etc. Special officers of the Tai Chang Sze : 28 PART II. — METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATION. 238.— SnfiN YoH Shu SHU-CefiNO i^i ISII^ ft ]£.— Director of the Sacred Music Department; 6 a. 239.— Sh^n Yoh Shu Snu-CH^fiNG iMi i||^ ft ^.—Sub- Director of the do. do.; 8 b. 240. — POH SzB ^ i.— Doctor; 7 a. 241.— TiBN Tsi H j|.— Recorder; 7 a. 242.— TuH Cnufi Kwan ^ H 'g.— Reciter of Prayers; 7 a. 243.— Ts^zK Tsi Shu FSng Sze j^ ^ J§ $ fE.— Offerer of Sacrifice; 7 b. 244. — TsAN Li Lang K H Sg. — Ceremonial Usher; 7a and 9 a. Commonly designated by the Manchu title of Hii~la Hd^/an. 245.— Hieh Lfir Lang {ft ^ Kg.- Chief Musician; 8 a. 246. — SzB Yoh ^ m. — Band-master; 9 b. Each court has also its Archivist, Sub-Archivist, etc. 247. — ^The Kwoh Tsze Kibn g -^ J|. — Imperial Academy of Learning. Lit. des. T^ai Hioh ^ ^. This, like the Han-lin College, is rather an assemblage of titled literary dignitaries than a body of officials with active fimctions. The ^^ Imperial Academy" has its nominal seat in a vast range of buildings adjacent to the Temple of Confucius, near the north-eastern angle of Peking, but, like most of the official institutions of the capital, it is visited only as a matter of form, at infrequent intervals, by the functionaries connected with it by their titles. The great quadrangle occupied by the institution is bounded east and west by a long arcade within which the monu- mental slabs erected to perpetuate the authorized text of the whole of the Confacian Books are arranged in rows. In the centre stands one of the most striking specimens of Chinese architecture, consisting in a lofty pavilion-shaped building, erected upon a platform of white marble placed in the midst of a circular piece of water, itself walled in with marble, and across which access is given to the building, by four marble bridges at the cardinal points. In this building, which represents the Pi Yung W S or Imperial College of antiquity, each sovereign is held PART II. — METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATION. 29 bound to enthrone himself once in the course of his reign, to preside over a solemn assemblage of all the scholars of the capital, in whose hearing a classical essay, nominally composed by his Majesty, and hence designated Yu Lun ^ H^, is recited. The department of study is divided into six classes, Liu T^ang /; jj^, the students connected with which receive a stipend from Govern- ment and are periodically examined. The schools for the instruc- tion of Russians and Liu-Ch4uans in the Chinese language, forming part of this institution, have ceased to exist. The Liu-Ch4uan class was known as the Nan Hioh ^ ^. The students of the Imperial Academy are designated Kien ShSng H ^, a title which is purchaseable throughout the Empire as the lowest literary degree. The officials of the department are as follows : 248.— KWAN-LI KwoH TszB KiBN Ta Ch^bn ^ 81 H •? K ^ g. — Chancellor of the Imperial Academy (a post usually con- ferred on one of the senior Grand Secretaries). 249. — ^Tsi Tsiu g fg. — Libationer; 4 b. One Manchu and one Chinese. Lit. des. Ta Sze Ch'hig ^ "Q jjR. 250. — SzB Ybh % H.— Tutor; 6 a. One Manchu, one Mongol, and one Chinese. Lit. des. Shao Sze Ch^ing^ ^ jjj. 251. — Ejbn Ch^^ng g ^. — Proctor; 7 a. 252.— PoH SzB If i.— Doctor; 7 b. 253.— TiBN Pu Jf^ a|.— Archivist; 8 b. 254.— Tien Tsi jH g.— Sub-Archivist; 9 b. 255. — Tsu KiAO Jfy Jfe. — Preceptor; 7 b. 256. — SzB Shb Hioh-Luh Q Jg ifl ^. — Registrar; 8 a. 257. — HiOH LuH ^ ^. — Sub-Registrar; 8 a. 258.— Hioh Ch^ng ^ ]£.— Director of Studies; 8 a. 259.— NaiT Shu Fang fg § g.— The Imperial College of Inscriptions. This is a committee formed by special appointment, at the sovereign's pleasure, of an indeterminate number of high literary officials, who are said to "do duty"— Aiwjp tsow f} j^ — in con- nection with the College. Their functions consist in preparing 30 1»ART II. — METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATION, transcripts of inscriptions in the imperial hand, for presentation to favoured personages, or for bestowal upon temples erected in honour of different deities whose supernatural interposition is thus from time to time acknowledged. They are also liable to be called upon to discharge the duties of a poet laureate, in preparing odes or similar compositions which it is intended to confer upon distinguished public servants. 260.— The K^in T^ien Kien fk 55 JR.— Imperial Board of Astronomy; with the following staff of officials: — 261.— KwAN Li Kien She Ta Ch^Iin if a £ V :;I^ g.— Chancellor; a special appointment. 262.— Ejen Ch^no £ £•— Director; 5 a. One Manchu and one Chinese. 263.— Kien Fu £ H|.— Sub-Director; 6 a. (As above.) 264.— Tso and Teo Kien Fu ^ ^ £ g).— Assistant Sub- Directors; 6 b. N.B. — The Ta TB^ing Htoei. Tien contains the proviso that the two above-named posts shall be filled by Europeans (referring to the missionary astronomers of the eighteenth century). 265. — ^Wu KwAN CnftNG 5 'g }£.- Secretary; 6 a. 266. — HiEH Hu CnfeNG 4E fi jE- — Keeper of the Clepsydra; 8 a. 267. — LingT^ai Lang S IE SB* — Keeper of the Observatory; 7 b. 268.— The T^ai I YfiAN ± fif K-— College of Imperial Physicians. 269. — ^YuAN She |^ ^. — Commissioner; 5 a. 270.— Tso and Yeo YIjan P«an £ $ R fj.— Senior and Junior Proctors; 6 a. 271. — Yu I m ff.— Imperial Physicians; 8 a. Fifteen in number. PART III. — PROVINCIAL ADMINISTRATION. 31 PART III.-PROVINCIAL ADMINISTRATION. 272- — Shih-pa ShSng +/Vi^.— The Eighteen Provinces. The moderu division of the Empire into provinoes^ called Shingj dates from the period of the Yiian dynasty (14th century), when, in addition to the departments of the central government, which were designated Chung Shu SliSng rf« ^ i^y thirteen provincial Governorships were established, under the title of "ambulatory" departments, or Chung Shu Hmg Siting (f^SfTW* The Ming dynasty inherited this system from their Mongol pre- decessors, and continued it with slight alteration, changing, however, the title of the provincial governors in the first instance to Ch'ing SiUm Pu CMng She ^ IK ^ lEJI 'j^v who became superseded later by Inspectors or SUn Fu jgj m, the Provincial Grovemors of the present day. To these, in the 16th century, Governors-General, Tsung-tuh |S ^y began to be added. The fifteen provinces of the Ming dynasty were Shan-tung, Shan-si, Ho-nan, Shen-si, Fnh- kien, Cheh-kiang, Eiang-si, Hu-kwang, Sze-ch^wan, Ewang-tung, Kwang-si, Yiin-nan, and Kwei-chow, with the two " metropolitan " provinces, Chih-li (or Peh Cliih-li) and Kiang-nan (or Nan Ghih-li), in which the northern and southern capitals, Peh King and Nan King, were respectively situated. In the reign K^ang Hi, of the present dynasty, the province of Ngan-hwei was separated from Kiang-nan, which thenceforward took the name of Kiang-su ; and Kan-suh was similarly formed by the partition of Shen-si. By dividing Hu-kwang into two provinces, which received the designations Hu-peh and Hu-nan, moreover, the number was brought up to eighteen. In contradistinction to the Chung Shu Slthig or Central Departments of State of the Yuan dynasty, the provinces to which the same title was, with a certain degree of modification, subsequently transferred, became entitled Chih ShSng ||[ i§, or " departments under government,'* and by this designa- tion they are now generically recognized. 32 PART III.— PROVINCIAL ADMINISTRATION. The provinces are divided into Fu jgp or Prefectures; Ting |g| or Independent Sub-Prefectures; Chih4% Cluno H ^ ^ or Independent Departments ; Chow ji{ or Departments subject to a Fu; and Him J^ or Districts subject to a i^M or Chih-li Chow. For the three Manchurian Provinces see Part V. The following table exhibits the names and grouping of the eighteen provinces, together with the literary or archaic designa- tions by which they are frequently referred to : ARCHAIC OR LITERARY DBSIGNATION. iK S or ^ ft in or jg Suborns H orfft f « 4111 m PRESENT NAME. 1. ChihJi iti^ 2. Kiang-su ftf^ 3. Ngan-hwei ^^ 4. Kiang-si JX|f 5. Shan-tung (1]]^ 6. Shan-si lIlBf 7. Ho-nan ^W 8. Shen-si S^W 9. Kan-suh -^ 10. Fuh-kien |gji 11. Cheh-kiang SJtJt 12. Hu-pgh JSSB4fc\ 13. Hu-nan ^^j 14. Sze-ch*wan h)|I 15. Kwang-tungUlK 16. Kwang-si j||f 17. Yiin-nan f^ilf 18. Kwei-chow jfcjfll TITLE OF GOVBRNGR- OENBRAL8HIP. } } } } 1ft ^ Chih-li (Separate) M Jl Liang Kiang, or ftl^ Kiang Nan. None, do. do. 15* -fl- Shen-Kan. f^^ Min-Chgh. MSi HuKwang, or ^ jgg Liang Hu. Hjll Sze-ch^wan(Sep.) ^JK Liang Kwang. Jl Yun-kwei. 273. — ^TsuNG-TUH H >|p. — Governor- General; 2 a. Off. des. CA^ Kan Hj^ ffi; Coll. des. Che-t'ai ^ ^. Being ex officio invested with the title of President of the Board of War, he styles himself Pu T^ang $ £• Is also ex officio a Junior Pre- sident of the Court of Censors. The Governor-General is the highest in rank of the civilian functionaries of the provincial administration, and is at the same time invested with special powers of control over the military forces within his jurisdiction. In the cases of Chih-U, Sze-ch'wan, and Kansuh, he administers affairs without the intervention of a Governor; whilst in the remaining cases, a Governor-General is placed, as a superior PART III. — PROVINCIAL ADMINISTRATION. 33 colleagne, beside the Governors of two, or, in the case of the Liaiig Kiang, of three separate provinces. For the administration of his military supervisorate, each Governor-General is provided with a special bureau, or Military Secretariat, entitled Ying WuJi Ch^u S Sf Jft- ^^^ adjutant, entitled Chung KUn rf* J^, is the Colonel commanding the Tuh piao brigade (see Nos. 439 and 453). He is entitled in addition to employ a staff of civil and military orderly oflScers, entitled WSn S&n-pu $ ^ M, who are usually officers of the rank of district Magistrate (in expectancy), and Wu SUri'pu |iC JS tA? of the rank of lieutenant. 274.— SuN-FU ^ J|.— Governor; 2 b. Off. des. Fu-yilanX 91 K 5 C^^* ^®®- F^'^^^i fil 'a 5 Style in corresp. Pu Yuan ^ (^ ; Epist. style, Chung Ch^ing tfi ^, and Fu KUn g| %. Ex officio invested with the titles of Ping Pu She-lang or Vice-President of the Board of War, and Yeo Fu Tu Yu She or Vice-President of the Censorate. Each of the eighteen provinces is under the control of an officer of this rank, with the exception of the pro- vinces of Chih-li, Kan-suh, and Sze-chVan, which are administered by Governors-General. The Governor is in all cases a colleague rather than a subordinate of the Governor-General. Shan-tung, Shan-si, and Ho-nan have no Governors-General over them. The Governor-General and the Governor, jointly, are spoken of as Tuh'Fu ^ 81 or Liang Yuan M K- 275. — Pu-CnfeNG Shk-Szb ^ H^ ^ f|. — Lieutenant- Governor, or Financial Commissioner (commonly called Treasurer); 2 b. Off. des. Fan Sze ^ ^; Coll. des. Fan t^ai ff ^ ; Epist. style. Fang Peh jjf ffi. The head of the civil service in each province, and treasurer of the provincial exchequer. Represents the earlier class of provincial governors as appointed under the Ming d3masty (see No. 272). 276. — ^Ngan-Ch^a She-Szb ^ ^ ft 3. — Provincial Judge or Judicial Commissioner; 3 a. Off. des. Nieh Sze fk ^l ^^I* des. Ifieh t^ai flk 'a ; Epist style. Lien Fang ||| gjf. {N.B. — The two foregoing officials are frequently classed together as Fan-Nieh Liang Sze flf Jt M fl ^^ ^^^ two Chief Commissioners of the provincial Government). 34 PART III. — PROVINCIAL ADMimSTRATIOST. 277.— Yen Yun She-Szb 9 ^ f| fl.— Salt Comptroller; 3 a. OfF. des. Yan Sze^^; Epist. style, Tu Chwa7i fjS W Chief Commissioner of the revenue derived from the provincial gabelle or salt monopoly. For minor ranks see in/rd^ Nos. 307 to 313. 278. — Liang Tag )|9 JJ. — Grain Intendant; 4 a. Chief comptroller of the provincial revenue from the grain tax, whether collected in money or in kind. Distinguished by various titles in different provinces, as Tuh Liang Tao ft ^ jB ^.nd Liang Ch^u Tao fi il it- (See infrd, No. 280.) 279. — Note. — The "provincial government," constituted by the above-named high officers, is commonly designated by the term Tuh Fu Sze Tao ft Hi €1 iS) embracing them all. The Sze TaOy or four high officials immediately below the rank of Governor, constitute in each province a Committee or Board of provincial administration. This Committee was named, during the Taiping rebellion, when its organization first came into general use, the KUn SU Tsung Kuh 9C IB iK ^ or Supreme Military Board; but of late years the title Shau'liow Tsung Kuh 8 IS H JS 01* Supreme Board of Beorganization (provincial administrative Board) has been substituted in the majority of cases. The phrase slum Iww implies the ** restoration of order," or pacifi- cation, after a state of rebellion or warfare. At Foochow, a Board of Foreign Affairs, similarly constituted, is designated the T^ung Sfiang Tsung Kuh ^ ^ |B ]§• 280.— FfeN Sun Tag f^ ^ Ji.— Intendant of Circuit; 4 a. Off", des. Tao Jft; Coll. des. Tao-t'ai j^ ■^; Epist. style Kwan- Ch^a |g ^ and Kim Sze £ ^« A functionary placed with administrative control over two or more Prefectures {Fu). In virtue of the powers of control over the military forces within his jurisdiction, which are usually annexed to a Taotai's office, he is officially designated Ping Pei Tao ^ fH ^, a title which dis- tinguishes him from the Liang Tao (see No. 278), or the Intendants of the Salt and Tea Revenue, Yen Ch^a Tao H i|^ jiE established in some of the provinces. (See also Hai-kivan Kien^iuh^ No. 324.) PART III. — PROVINCIAL ADMINISTRATION. 35 Note. — All ofRcials appertaining to the above ranks are spoken of or addressed in conversation by the title Ta Jen ;fj A appended to their surnames; except in the Case of members of the Grand Secretariat or titular "Imperial Guardians" (see Part II, Nos, 135, 139, and 142). 281.— Chb Fu JD JjJ.— Prefect; 4 b. Off. des. Show t^; Epist style T'ai Show ^(j ^. Personal designation in recital of titles, Clieng T^ang j£ ^. The title of the officer governing the largest of the provincial subdivisions, or Fuy of which each province at the present day embraces, on an average, about ten. There are now, in all, 183 Fu or Prefectures, the smallest number (seven) being in Shensi, and the largest (thirteen) in Kiangsi. The Che Fu '•I of the present period represents the Kun Show fB "^ of the earliest administrative division of the'Empire, under Ts'in She Hwang-ti, B.C. 221, and the T'ai Show of the Han dynasty (reign of King Ti, B.O. 156). The Prefecture of the present day is frequently spoken of as KUn f|{, in reference to the ancient designation. The incumbent of the prefecture within which the provincial capital is situated is designated Slvow Eu "M* iff or the chief (head) Prefect (of the province). 282.— T'UNG Che (g ^.—Sub-Prefect; 5 a. Coll. des. Urh Fu ^ }^; Epist. style Sze Ma ^ J^. To be distinguished as (A) First-class Sub-Prefect, administering a T^ing or indepen- dent sub-prefecture, and (B) Second-class Sub-Prefect, holding office under a Che Fu. Of this latter class there are a variety of denominations, according to the functions exercised. Such are Hai Fang Tung Che Mf^ ^ {^ ^9 Maritime Sub-Prefect; Kan Min T^ung Clie or Knn Min Fu % Sk }^^ Sub-Prefect with military jurisdiction; Shuei Li T'ung Clie i^JCJpJ l^^j Sub-Prefect in charge of water communications; Li Fan T^ung Che i|£$|^^9 Sub-Prefect in authoriiy over aboriginal tribes, etc. A distinct office is Li Slie T'ung Che 2B ^ 1^ ^9 ^^ Civil Commissary of a Manchu Garrison.' 283.— T^UNG-P^AN 3§ fj.— Assistant Sub-Prefect; 6 a. Epist. style Pieh Kia gl] ^ ; Coll. des. San Fu H M- Holds office imder either a Prefect or an independent Sub-Prefect. 36 PART III. — PROVINCIAL ADMINISTRATION. Distinguished, according to the functions exercised, by titles such as Liang Pu T^ung-p^an fl| li ii fH? Revenue and Police Sub- Prefect,— and Pm 2^ao T^ung-p^an MfiEJiifi? Police Sub-Prefect, etc. 284. — Che Chow ^ fl\. — Department Magistrate; 5 a and 5 b. Off. des. Mu ^g;; Epist style Sze Ma p^ ^. To be dis- tinguished Rs ]j|[ ^ ^ Magistrate of an independent Department or Chih-li Chow, i.«., subject to no prefectural control but reporting direct to the provincial government ; and ^ f\ Magistrate of a subordinate Department or San Chmo^ forming part of a prefecture. Note. — The C7«« Chaw of the present period are considered to be the counterparts of the Tb'zb She M £ of the Sung dynasty. Wu Ti, of the Han dynasty, had in more ancient times given this title to Governors of provinces (Chow). 285. — Chow T'ung i)JI (g. — First-class Assistant Department Magistrate; 6 b. Epist style Pieh Kia jj/^ H and Cliow Sze-tna 286. — Chow P^an jHI fj- — Second-class Assistant Depart- ment Magistrate ; 7 b. Epist. style Cho Pieh-Kia JH JSA M- 287. — Li MuH IJI g. — Department Police-master and Jail Warden ; 9 b. Note. — The three foregoing offices are common to both classes of Departments (see No. 284). 288. — Tso Urh ^ JJ. — ^Assistant Magistrates, whether of Prefectures, Departments, or Districts. Lit. des. Ch^hig Ts^iii ^ {^. To be distinguished from Tso Tea (see No. 322). 289.— Che Hien 9b J|@R.— District Magistrate; 7 b. OflP. des. Ling ^; Epist. style Ming Fu Ifi Mi ^^ ^^ ifc ^j and t ^ Yth Tsun g^ dj. Personal designation in recital of titles ChSng T^ang J£ g. The district within which a provincial capital is situated gives the title of Shaw Hien *§* H to its incumbent. 290.— Note.— The Fu Chow Hien Iff W IS or Prefects and Magistrates of different classes constitute the general ad- PART III. — PROVINCIAL ADMINISTRATION. 37 ministrative body of the provincial civil service. They are charged with the collection of revenue, the maintenance of order, and the primary dispensation of justice, as well as with the conduct of literary examinations and of the government postal service, and in general with the exercise of all the direct Ainctions of public administration. They are commonly spoken of as Fu Mu Kwan ^ {^ ^, or officials who stand in loco parentis toward the people — to., who are the "father and mother" of the people. AH officials in the above-mentioned ranks are colloquially spoken of or addressed as Ta Lao Yeh ;fc ^ 3S* 291. — HiBN Ch'Sng H £. — ^Assistant District Magistrate; 8 a. Coll. des. Tio T^ang 2£ JJ; Epist. style Urh Tm%^. 292. — Chu Pu i K- — Deputy Assistant Magistrate; 9 a. Epist. style San Yin ^ |^. 293. — SiJN KiKN ^ Ut-— Sub-district Deputy Magistrate; 9 b. 294. — ^TiEN Shb K:£. — District Police-master and Jail Warden; unclassed. Coll. des. Pu THng ^ 0; Lit. des. Yea T'ang ^ ^ ; Epist. style Shoo Yn ^ jH", Shao Yin iJ? ^, Lien Pu H tt, and Sfiao Fu ^ J^. 295. — KiNG-LiH fg^ gg. — Commissary of Records, or Secre- tary. Coll. des. Kmg T'ing S tf; ^P^^^- ^^V^^ ^«^^'< ^^'^ ^%- In the office of a Lieutenant-Governor, has 6 b; of a Provincial Judge, 7 a ; of a Salt Comptroller, 7 b ; of a Prefect, 8 a. 296. — Chad Mo $E[ ^. — Commissary of the Seal, or Corre- spondence Secretary. Coll. des. Chao THng ^ |g|. In the office of a Lieutenant-Governor, has 8 b; of a Provincial Judge, 9 a; of a Prefect or First-class Sub-Prefect, 9 b. 297. — K*u Ta She j|t :fc ffi. — Treasury Keeper. Coll. des. K'u T'ing ^ K|. In office of a Lieutenant Governor, a Salt Comptroller, or Superintendent of Customs, has 8a; of a TaoHai, 9 b; of a Prefect, etc., unclassed. 298. — ^Tu She |0 ^. — ^Assistant Secretary; 7 b. Coll. des. Tu She THng fS ^ 38 PART III. — PROVINCIAL ADMINISTRATION. 299.— Li Wen 3 ^.— Law Secretary; 6 b. 300. — Che Shb ^ 1ft- — Archivist; 8 a, 8 b, and 9 a. Employed in offices of a Provincial Judge, Salt Comptroller, and (formerly) of a Prefect. 301. — Ts'ang Ta She ^ ^ ^. — Granary Keeper; 9 a, and unclassed, according to degree of jurisdiction. 302.— SzB Ytj % it.— Jail Warden of a Provincial Judge- ship or a Prefecture ; 9 a. 303.— KiAO Show ffelf . — Director of Studies ; 7 a. Attached to a Prefecture. Lit. des. Kivang Win J| 3!C» 304. — HiOH ChIing 4|jE.— Director of Studies; 8 a. Attached to a department. 305.— KiAO Yu H; St.— Director of Studies; 8 a. Attached to a district Lit. des. Fuh Yu :g[ m^, from the full official title Fu SMh Kiao Yn ^^^^^ which indicates the "restoration" of the office after its temporary abolition in the last century. Epist. style Sze Kiao % fj;, and Ching Chat jE X* 306.— Sun Tao n ^.—Sub-Director of Studies; 8 b. Lit. des. Fuh Sun ^ fH from Fuh SMh £t2n Too flt K P| ^ (see above). Epist. style Sze San % |||| and Fu Chai g{| ^. Note. — ^The above-named four officials act as superintendents and registrars of the candidates preparing for the Literary Exa- minations and as custodians of the Confucian Temples, etc. 307.— YuN T^UNG fg ig.— Assistant Salt Comptroller; 4 b. 308.— YuN Fu ^ g!|.— Depuiy-Assistant Salt Comptroller; 5 b. 309.— T^i Ku H 5.— Inspector of the Salt Department; 5 b. 310.— YuN P'an 3S Ij.— Sub-Assistant Salt Comptroller; 6 b. 311.— Yen-K^o-Szb Ta She H ^ H :;^ ft.— Receiver of the Salt Department; 8 a. 312.— P'i-Ybn-So Ta She ^ St J5 ^ ft.— Examiner PART IIL— PROVINCIAL ADMINISTRATION. 39 of the Salt Department H 5| ; 8 a. Examiner of the Tea Depart- ment ^ §1 ; unelassed. 813.— Ybn-Ch^a Ta She 9^ :fc iS|.— Examiner of the Tea and Salt Department; nnclassed. 314._Shuei-K^o-Sze Ta She 5R ^ ^ :fe ^g.— Customs' Examiner. In a prefecture ; 9 b. In a department or district, unelassed. 31 5._SuAN.K^o-SzB Ta She g ^ ^ :^ ^.—Customs' Examiner; 9 b. 316.— Shubi-K'o Ffiif^ SzB Ta She ^ ^ ^ g :^ ^.— Customs' Deputy Examiner; unelassed. 317.— KwAN Ta She H ^ jgg.- Customs' Examiner; unelassed. 318. — Ho Po So 29 {3 J^- — River Police Inspector; unelassed. Coll. des. Ho T'ing fSl tf. 31 9. — YiH Cn^fiNG ^ ^. — Postmaster ; unelassed. 320.— Chah Kwan ||^ §. — Sluice Keeper; unelassed. 321.-»KiBN Ejao UJ :gJ5. — Police Inspector in a Prefecture; unelassed. iV.-B. — This office no longer exists. 322.— Tso TsA ^ JS.— Petty officials. Assistant Magistrates, Secretaries to Prefect, and the like, belonging to the eighth rank, are designated tso; whilst minor officials, of the ninth rank, and those unelassed, such as Jail Warden, etc,, are designated tea. (See No. 288.) 323.— HiOH ChSng H Igj;.- Provincial Director of Education or Literary Chancellor. Off. des. Hioh Yuan ^ J^ ; Coll. des, Hioh T'ai ^^; lit des. Win Tsung ^J ^j and Tuh Hioh She ChS^ ^^ if. Full official title is TH-tuh Hioh Yuan % % » ^. A special appointment, usually filled by officials of high literary degrees who leave Peking for three years to serve in this capacity. They preside at the prefectural examinations, and give the degree of siu ta^ai^ which admits to the triennial competition for the M'jin degree. (See Part IX, No. 469.) 40 ' PART III. — PROVINCIAL ADMINISTRATION. 324. — Hai Kwan Kien-tuh ilH H £ if. — Superintendent of Customs. %X){ various ranks. At Canton, a special officer, appointed from the Imperial Household, bears the designation Yoeh Hai Kwan Pu J^ JIK H {fS^ or Superintendent of Customs for the province of Kwangtung. Is commonly designated by Europeans as the "Hoppo," a term the derivation of which is unknown. At Foochow, the Manchu General-in-Chief fills a similar position. At the Custom House of Hwai-ngan, a special appointment is likewise made, the three functionaries in question being regarded as special purveyors for the Court. Elsewhere, the office is usually filled by a Taotai, in addition to his territorial duties. In such case he receives the designation Kwan Too j^ ^. Within recent years, a special "Customs' Taotai'' has been established at Tientsin, without territorial jurisdiction. 325. — Chih Tsao m^ Jg. — Superintendent of an Imperial Manufactory, at Nanking, Soochow, or Hangchow. Specially appointed, from the Imperial Household, to superintend the manu- facture and despatch of silk textile fabrics and other requisites for the use of the Imperial Court. 326.— Ho Tung Ho Tao Tsung-tuh |^ ^ fjj ^M tt-— Director-General of the Yellow River; 2 a. Ordinary designation Ho Tao Tsung tuh. The duties attached to this post have in recent years become much reduced in importance, the Governors of Honan and Shantung having become the active agents in the con- servation of the river embankment works. A military division, under the orders of the Director-General, is designated the Ho Piao |i|f |g. It numbers at present about 1,700 rank and file, having its head quarters at Tsi-ning Chow, in Shantung. 327.— Ts^AO YtjN Tsung-tuh ff % (g ft.— Director-General of the Grain Transport ; 2 b. This functionary has the grain transportation system, for the conveyance of the rice from the southern provinces to Peking, under his control. The Wei^^ and /Sb J^, or first and second class transport-stations, connected with this system, have a special military organization of their own. Of late years, the introduc- PART III.— PROVINCIAL ADMINISTRATION. i 41 tion of steam-shipping, concurrently with the progressive difficulties of navigation on the YUn Ho ^ ||J, or Grand Canal, has led to the larger portion of the grain despatched to Peking being forwarded by sea to Tientsin. Of the Hai YUn ^ S, or grain transport by sea, a part is conducted by the steamers of the CJiao S/iang Kuh ffl ^ J§> the so-called "China Merchants' Sfceam-ship Company," which was established as a Government institution in 1872. 328. — T*u KwAN i ff. — Administrators of ** Native" Districts. The portions of the provinces of Kwangsi and Kweichow which are inhabited exclusively by the Miao-tsze "jJSf ^ and other aboriginal tribes are in some cases organized as Districts or Departments under hereditary Magistrates, the representatives of ancient independent chiefs. They are generically designated as above; but the ruler of each district or department bears the ordinary Chinese official title, with the character t'u prefixed, as i jj(|, and jt )Ss» ii Yunnan, four "native" prefectures, t'ufu i jjf, are organized, with four t^u c/iow^ or "native" departments. The province of Kwangsi has 26 "native" departments, and four districts of the same class. The process of exchanging the status of a tribe under the direct government of its hereditary chief or magistrate for that of the ordinary Chinese population, or the *' bestowal of rights of citizenship,'* is described by the phrase kai t'u ioei liu Qfk db ft SK* 329. — T*u SzE i '3-— The Native Tribes j and their Chieftains. This is the designation applied in general to all the multi- tudinous tribes of aborigines who overspread the southern and western provinces, and occupy the border-land between China on the one side and Annam, Laos, Burmah, and Tibet on the other. The most widely distributed and important of these are the Miao Tsze "jjjf ^ of Kwangsi, Kweichow, and Sze-ch'wan, the Lo-lo ^JH i^^^^W^ ^f Sze-chVan and Yunnan, and the Shans, who occupy the southern and western portions of that province and 42 PART III. — PROVINCIAL ADMINISTRATION. the frontier lands beyond. This last-named race, the representa- tives of a once powerful and still widely-spread nationality, whose name (as known to Europeans through the Burmese) may be traced in the Sien of Sien-Lo JS IB ^^ Siam, are considered by the Chinese as the descendants of the people of Yiieh Shang j^ ^ of whom their most ancient records make mention. The designation attributed to them in Chinese literature is Lao Chwa ^ 3, in which an afBniiy to the Laos of the Burmese and Siamese is plainly apparent The Shans of the border-land between Yunnan and Burmah term themselves, and are commonly known as, Pat I JH 5^. Chinese official writers, however, describe them as Lao Chwa, and the designation Pai I is applied in the description of the tribes of Yunnan {Nan Man Che Ifif ^ ^, Book III, forming part of the topography of that province), to the aborigines of the Kwangsi frontier, who are distinguished as Jtan ^ and shuei i^ or Land, and Water, Pai I. The government of the semi-in- dependent tribes in general is left in the hands of their hereditary chieftains, upon whom high-sounding titles of various degrees are bestowed, in accordance with a system introduced originally by the Mongol conquerors of China. According to the size and importance of the territory they rule over, these chieftains — known to the Burmese, on the south-western frontier, by the title of tsaubwa — are invested with different gradations of rank, as is shewn in the following list : 330.— Che Hwei She Sze ft H ft ^; 3 a. 331.— SuAN Wei She Sze g gt ft S; 3 h. 332.— SuAN Pu She SzE g is ft 3; 4 b. 333.— Chad T*ao She Sze ^ fj ft Q; 5 b. 334.— Ngan Fa She SzE $ is 1^ ^; 5 b. In each of the tribal Governments as above, subordinate ranks are provided with the following titles: T^UNG Che |^ ^ ; rank varying from 3 b to 6 a. Fu She glj ft ; do. do. 4 b to 6 b. K*iBN She ^ :^; do. do. 4 a to 7 a. PART III. — PROVINCIAL ADMINISTRATION, 43 The following are the titles and ranks in a different class of tribal government: 335.— Ts'iEN Hu -f- ^; 5 a, 336.— Fu Ts^iKN Hu gj ^ ^; 5 k 337.— PehHu-S ^; 6 a. 338. — Chiang Kwan Szb Chiang Ewan :g1^^fiff ; 6 a. Fu Chiang Kwan SI :g ^ ; 7 a. Chiang Ewan Sze Li Muh £frflSS ; unclassed. 44 PART IV. — GOVERNMENT OF PEKING. PART IV.-GOVERNMENT OP PEKING. 339. — Fu Yin }^ ^. — Governor of (the Imperial Prefecture of) S/iuti't'ien Fu Jij^ J^ jjjj, ue.y the region enclosing the imperial eapital^^ a. Lit. des. King Chao ^ ^^. Beside the actual Governor, there is a Governor Adjoint, or Kim Yin ^ 5^, appointed from among the Presidents and Vice-Presidents of Boards, who exercises a concun-ent authority. 840. — Fu Ch^^ng JjjSf 2g. — Vice-Governor of Shun-t^ien Fu; 4 a. Lit. des. Fu King Cliao glj ^ ^f^. 341.— Che Chung ^ tfi.— Sub-Prefect of Shun-i'ien Fu; 5 a. ^*^ In addition to the foregoing officials, the usual subordinate ranks appertaining to a Prefecture are also represented within the jurisdiction of Shun-t^ien Fu. 342.— Wu Gn'tm Yu She £ |^ ^ ft .—The Police Censors. The city and suburbs of Peking are mapped out into five divisions, termed the Wu Ch^Sng or Five Cities, viz., the centre, embracing the neighbourhood of the Imperial Palace, and the North, South, East, and West. (See Part II, No. 189). One Manchu and one Chinese Censor is appointed to control the police and primary judicial arrangements of the capital. The subordinate ranks are as follows : 343.— Ping Ma Szb €he Hwbi ^ ^ W^ f?.— Police Magistrate; 6 a. One to each of the five divisions of Peking. Common des. Sze Kwan p[ ^. These officials exercise a primary jurisdiction in judicial cases throughout the city and suburbs of Peking. 344._PiNQ Ma Sze Fu Che Hwei |£ Jg ^ gl] }§■ ^.— Assistant Police Magistrate; 7 b. One to each of the five divisions of Peking. Common des. Fang Kwan j^ 1^. 845. — Li Muh |^ g. — Police-master and Jail-warden. PART iV.-^GOViffiRNMENT OF PEKING. 45 346.— KiEi Tao T*ing ft Jf g|.— The Roadway Office. The repair and maintenance of the streets of the outer (Chinese) city of Peking; are, nominally, cared for by this department, which is presided over by the police Censors. The preservation of public order is also included among its duties. 347.— Pu KtjN YiNG ^ ^ g,— The Division of Gendar- merie. The police arrangements of the capital are conducted by the TH^tuh Yamin £ fip ffi P^^ or Office of Gendarmerie, under which the Fu Kan Ying, a force recruited from the Eight Banners (see Part VI), is placed. The men of this force, numbering from 15,000 to 20,000, are distributed in squads at guard stations, Kwcvti tHrtg 1^ i|g, throughout the city and suburbs. Judicial cases in which Bannermen alone are litigants, are heard by this office. Mixed Cases, between Bannermen and ordinary Chinese, are dealt with by the police Censors. The men of the gendarmerie are also charged with the duty of maintaining the roadways of the city proper. 348.— Pu KiJN T'UNG Ling ^ ^ fiK ®.— General Com- mandant of the Gendarmerie; 1 b. Has also the designation TH-tufi Kill MSn San Pu Wu Ying Ji^^P^igJMSg officially preceding his title as above, with reference to his command over the Nine Gates of the city proper and of the Five Battalions of Chinese troops forming the police of the city and its environs. Hence his common appellation of Kiti M4n 'Pi-tuh ^ P3 JS S, or General of the Nine Gates. The incumbent of the office is usually also President or Vice-President of one of the Boards. The total number of troops comprised within the Wu Ying, or SUn Pu Ying JS if g, is officially reckoned at 4,000 mounted and 6,000 foot soldiers. In reality, the force is much smaller. 349.— Tso and Yeo Yih Tsung Ping 2£ ^ R JB H-— Police Provosts, or Lieutenant-Generals, senior and junior, of the Gendarmerie; 2 a. Usually hold office also as Vice-Presidents of Boards. 350.— Yih Yu % j^.— Deputy Provost; 3 a. 46 PART IV. — GOVERNMENT OF PEKING. 351.— Pang Pan Yih Yu fff Igl H J^.— Assistant Deputy Provost; 3 b. 352.— HiEH Yij ^ ^.— Major of Police; 4 a. 353._Fu YiJ glj jH".— Captain of Police; 5 a. 354.— Pu KuN Hiao jp ^ igg.— Lieutenant of Police; 5 b. 355._Wei Shu Pu Kun Hiao # S ^ H :g.— Deputy Lieutenant of Police; 6 a. 356.— Sin P'ao Tsung-Kwan ft 1S2 18 flf.— Controller of the Alarm-signal guns; 4 a. Gate Gtiarda: 357.— Ch^Sng MfeN Ling ^ H SS-— Captain of a Gate; 4b. 358. — MfeN Ts^iEN-TsuNG p^ ^ H.— Lieutenant of a Gate; 6 a. 359._CH^IiNG Men Li jig R g.— Clerk of a Gate; 7 a. 360.— TS^UNG WfeN MISN KlEN-TUH # ^K M S ff-— Superintendents of the Customs and Octroi of Peking. A com- mission consisting of one principal and one secondary High Commissioner, appointed annually. The title borne by them is derived from the fact that the principal office of the Collectorate is situated near the Ts^ung Wen Gate (Ha-ta Men) of the city. Out-stations are established in a cordon around Peking, ranging to a distance of from ten to thirty miles. 361.— Tso and Yeo Yih Kibn-tuh 2£ :& R ffi '&.— Superintendents of the Live-stock and House duty at Peking. Two Commissioners, annually appointed, one each for the East and West divisions of the city. 362.— Ts^ang Chiang ^ Jg.— The Peking Granaries. These are controlled by a commission of two officers with the rank of Vice-President of the Board of Revenue— hence called Ta'ang Chiang She-lang j^ jj^ f^ J^, whose head quarters are at T^ung Chow, the point at which the grain from the southern provinces is landed. Their two principal subordinates are of the PART IV. — GOVERNMENT OF PEKING. 47 rank of lang chung (see Part II, No. 163) with the title Tso Liang T^ing ^ ^ Hg, or Grain Super\dsors of the Board of Revenue. 363.— Pao Ts^uan Kuh Jg % jg.— The Coinage department of the Board of Revenue. 364.— Pao Yuan Kuh Jf }g ^.— The Coinage department of the Board of Works. The above are the two departments at which the copper cash constituting the currency recognized by the Chinese Government is minted. In each case, the department is placed under the supervision of one of the two junior Vice-Presidents of the Board, with the addition of the words Kien Li Ts^ien Fa T^ang She \Vu ^aiiiab^^gfto liis title. (See Part 11, No. 161.) 48 PART V. — THE THREE MANCHURIAN PROVINCES. PART V.-THE THREE MANCHURIAN PROVINCES. 365.— The Tung San Sh^ng JH H ^Mj or Tliree Eastern provinces, comprise the territory originally inhabited by the Manchu race, which is divided into tliree provinces. The two most northerly of these, Heh-lung Kiang or T'sitsUiar — the Amur, and Kiririj are organized upon a purely military basis, whilst FSttg-t^ien^ the southernmost, including tlie Manchu capital, named ShSng King or Moukden, approximates more closely in its form of administra- tion to that of the eighteen provinces of China Proper. The system of government of the province of Fevg-t^ienj indeed, was remodelled in 1876, bringing it even more nearly than before into harmony with that of the rest of China. Its distinctive mark in the past was the control exercised by the Five local Boards, corresponding to the Boards of Revenue, Ceremonies, War, Punishments, and Works, at Peking, over the affairs of the province in general. The authority heretofore vested in these boards has now been con- centrated in the hands of the Military Governor, to whom the position and title of a Governor-General (see Tsung-tuhj Part III, No. 273) have been accorded. 366.— Province of F^ng-tien 3^ 5^.— Commonly called ShSng King jS 3sC> f^om the Chinese designation of its capital city, otherwise known as Moukden, from the name it bears in the Manchu language. 367.— TsiANG KxjN JH 3|.— Military Governor; 1 b. (Since 1876 invested with the title and attributes of a provincial Governor- General or Tmng-iuh). 368.— Fu Yin }^ ^.— Civil Governor (with title and attri- butes of a provincial Governor or SUn Fu). 369.— Fu Ch^Iing /jj ^.— Civil Vice-Governor and ex officio Provincial Literary Examiner. 370.— Fu Tu-T^UNG gtj ^ DJ.— Military Deputy- Lieutenant- Governor ; 2 a. Commanding various divisions of the province. PART V. — THE THREE MANCHURIAI^ PROVINCES. 49 371.— Cn^feNG Show-tij jj| «5P j®.— Military Commandant; 3 a. An appointment held under the Military Lieutenant-Governorgf, in command of the garrisons of the various prefectural and depart- mental cities. 372.— Fang Show-yu jSjjjf ^ J|^. — Military Commandant of the second class; 4 a. . * * ^ In addition to the functionaries of the provincial Govern- ment enumerated above, there exist at Moukden, furthermore, counterparts (on a reduced scale) of the Boards of Revenue, Ceremonies, War, Punishment, and Works as established at Peking, each presided over by a Vice-President who acts, in his own particular department, as a colleague of the Military Governor. 373. — Province of Kirin •§ ^ ig. — Governed by a Tsiang Kiln or Military Governor (see No. 367), with Military Deputy-Lieutenant-Governors (see No. 370) at the following points : i. Kirin Ula {city of Kirin) "^ ^ j^ ^' ii. Ningutd ^ ifr ^. iii. PetunS fg ^ ff^. iv. Sansing ^ jjj. V. Altch'ukha M Jil % ^• A small number of officials of the lower civilian and literary ranks are also stationed in different parts of the province. 374. — Province of Heh-lung Kiang H || ZC i^^ or TsiTSiHAR. Governed by a Tsiang Kiln or Military Governor (as above), with Military Deputy-Lieutenant-Governors at the following points : i. He/i'lung Kiang ^ H Hi* ii. Mergum S fi ^• iii. Tsitsiliar ^ ^ i^ IS* There is, in addition, a civil administration at the town of Hu-lan THng If |g ®. 375. — Ta Sheng Jf 43^. — Hunters; a designation applied to the indigenous population of certain districts in the two above- 50 PART V. — THE THREE MANCHURIAN PROVINCES, named provinces^ who are held bound to pay certain tribute of animals or ftirs. 376. — Yko Muh ^ ig^. — Nomads. The wandering tribes existing within the limits of Manchuria are placed under the superintendence of the following officials: — 377.— Yeo Muh CnfeNG YtJ gf ft IE JH".— Chief Super- intendent of Nomads; 7 a. 378.— Yeo Muh Fu Yu J^ ft gi| |^.— Assistant do. do.; 7 b. PART VI. — THE MANCHU MILITARY ORGANIZATION. 51 PART VI -THE MANCHU MILITARY ORGANIZATION. 379.— Pa K*i A IR— The Eight Banners. The armj specially appertaining to the Mancha dynasty is known as the Eight Banners, from the organization introduced by the early sovereigns of the reigning family. These Banners are distinguished by the colours enumerated below, and are farther divided into two classes, viz., the Three Superior and the Five Inferior Banners, as follows : i. Bordered Yellow ft |iE 1 ± H ft ii. Plain . „ jE it f The Three iii. „ White jE & J Superior Banners. iv. Bordered „ Jl 6 T£Jft The Five Inferior Banners. V. Plain Red ]£ ^ vi. Bordered „ M^LY vii. Plain Blue j£ ]g viii. Bordered „ fSk^ ^ The nationalities composing the Banner force are three in number, viz., Manchu, Mongolian, and Chinese, the latter, known as Han KUn ^ ^, consisting in the descendants of those natives of northern China who joined the Manchu invaders during the period of their contest with the Ming dynasty in the early part y of the seventeenth century. Each nationality bears the Manchu designation of Ku-sai (written Kn-shan @ jlj); and as a complete division of each nationality exists under the colour of each of the Banners enumerated above, there are in fact 24 banners, or eight ^ KH divided into three Ku-sai each. Under one or other of these divisions all living Manchus, and all descendants of the Mongolian and Chinese soldiery of the Conquest, are enrolled. Each banner of the Manchu and Mongolian nationalities, again, is divided into a nui kH f^ ]Q^ and a wai kH ^ ]^, t.e., an Inner and Outer division. The inner division is composed of the so-called paO'i Q ^, from the Manchu 6o-/, signifying a bondservant, who 52 PABT VT. — THE MANCHU MILITARY ORGANIZATION. are especially bound to render suit and service. The pao-i of the three Superior Banners appertain to the JViii Wu Fu or Imperial Household (see Part I, No. 62), whilst those of the remaining five Banners are attached to the various Princely houses or Wang Fu (see Part I, No. 31). ^ The Btoners constitute, in fact, tba population of Peking, with offshoots in various provincial garrisons; and a certain number of the adult males of the force receive pay as meipbers of one or other of the military corps into which they have, from time to time, been organized, in addition to the pittance they receive as soldiers , of the Banner.* The General Head Quarter Office of the Banners is designated the Chih Nim KH {| ^ j^^, to which one Tu t^ung (see below) from each Banner is annually appointed to do duty. All correspondence relating to the Banner force as a whole* passes through this office. The official organization of the Banners is as follows: • 380. — ^Tu-T^UNG Hi SKI. ^Lieutenant-General; 1 b. One to each hjaai or national division of a Banner. (For the Tu T^ung acting as Military Lieutenant-Governors, see Part XI, No. 548.) 381 . — Fu Tu-T^UNG gl| 9 ig^. — Deputy Lieutenant-General ; 2 a* (For the Fu Tu T^ung of the provincial Banner garrisons, see infrdj No. 427.) 382.— YiN Wu Ts^AN^LiNG ^ K ^ fi.— Adjutant-General; 3 a. Two to each of the twenty-four Banners (except the Mongo- lian, which have but one). Selected from the Colonels (see below.) 383.— HiAO-K^i Ts<AN-LiNG @ H j£^ f|.— Colonel; 3 a. Has the general civil control over a sub-division or Cha-la ^ IK, of which there are five in each of the Manchu and Han Kiin Banners. In the Mongolian Banners there are but two of these 1sub-di visions. ♦ For a complete analysis of the various forms of the Banner organization, with all details of the composition and pay of the forces, as shewn on paper, see The Army of the Chinese Empire, a series of articles by T. F. Wade (Sir T. F, Wade, E.C.B.)) in the Chine$e Bepontory for May, June, and July, 1851, Vol. ZX. PART VI. — THE MANCHU MILITARY ORGANIZATION. 53 384.— Fu HiAO-K*i Ts^an-ling glJlgJB ^®[.— Lieutenant- Colonel; 4 a. One to each Cha-la or sub-division (as above). 385.— YiN-Wu Chang-king ^ K jt ^.—Adjutant; 5 b. Conducts the civil correspondence of the Banner. Although less in degree of rank than the Uo^ling (see below) this officer is con- sidered as filling the higher post, and is promoted from it to the rank of lieutenant-colonel — No. 384. The term eltang-king is a corruption of the Manchu word chan^yiuy signifying an "assistant." (See Part II, No. 133.) 886.— Wei Yin-Wu Chang-king ^ EP Sf S ^.—Assistant Adjutant. Appointed from the grade of Hiao KH Hiao. 887. — Tso-LING ^ ^. — Captain ; 4 a. Of this rank there are, in each Manchu banner, from 70 to 80 officers, and in each of the Han-kiin Banners, from 30 to 40, according to the strength of the corps. Acting under the immediate command of the ts^an-ling (see No. 383) of the eha~la to which he belongs, the tso-ling is specially charged with the control of some 70 to 100 of the house- holds of the Banner. The Uo-ling hold in some cases their appointments by hereditary right, either as Hiin Kiu JH ^ or as She Kwan ^ ^ Tso-ling, Those who become entitled to appoint- ment by various processes of selection are designated Kung Chung ^ i(t, FSn Kwan ^ 9, and Lun Kwan ||| ^ Tao-ling. 388.— Pan Ko Tso-ling ^ <B ^ 0[.— Half Tso-ling. A title formerly in use but now almost, if not entirely, obsolete, to designate the captains of companies numbering less than one hundred strong. 389.— HiAO-K^i Hiao jg £f :R.— Lieutenant ; 6 a. Officers of this grade are drawn upon to fill the post of Pu Kan Hiao (see Part IV, No. 354). Their post in the Banner is then filled by a "deputy," of lower rank, with the following title: 390.— Wbi Shu Hiao-K^i Hiao ^ S £g if :K.— Sub^ lieutenant; 8 b. Promoted from the post of pi/i-t^ieh-she (see Partll, No. 181). . 391 . — LiNG-TS^ui f^fH' — Corporal (non-commissioned officer). Acts under the orders of Hiao Ki Hiao. 64 PART VI. — ^THE MAKCHU MILITARY OEOANIZATIOI^. 392.— Ma Kia Jg fp .— .(Manch. UheaAi.) Pirat-class Private Sol4ierf receivlqg 3 Tls. per men^m. SQS.'-^Ao-TTRH-PU 50ClB ^S* — (Manch. Orbo.) Second-class Private Soldier, receiving 2 Tls. per mensem. , Also called Luh- Kioh Ping Jj ^ ^, or chevaux de frise bearer, from his traditional duty on parade and in action. In the Han KUn Banners only. 394. — ^Yang Yu Ping ^ "^ &.-. — Supernumeraries or juniors, awaiting appointment to the position of second or first class private, as v^a9cies occur. In all the Banners. 395. — HiEN San ^ fj;.— (Manch. Suld,) B^nn^riPQU ^t large, without position or pay. Paid Forces of tlm banner Organization: The various corps organized from the Banner population of Peking are as follows? 396.— Hu Kt^N YiNG H H g.— The Guards' Division. Common des. Ta Ting ^ § (the main division). This force was organized during the early wars of the Manchu sovereigns, with the designation Pa-ya-ld^ which was exchanged in A-P. 1660 for its Chinese equivalent now in use. Admission into the corps, which is estimated as numbering some 3,000 to 4,000 strong^ con- stituted until lately the special ambition of the great mass of the Bannermen of Peking, to whom it secured the advantages of "substantial addition to their pay and prospects of promotion in a degree which, until the institution of the SMn Kl Ying (see infrd^ No. 415), was attainable by comparatively few. From the place assigned to the two main sections of the Division, on the right and left wings of the Banner force when drawn up for review or action, the title "Flank Division" has been given to this corps by Sir T. F. Wade in his article on the Chinese army already frequently referred to. The principal duty assigned to the corps, at the same time^ is that of fomishing detachments of guards for the Imperial palace. It consists of eight divisions corresponding to the eight Banners, i^ach Ojf yf\?idk is compmnded by a T^ung-Ung (see below) : 397. —Hu KtJK T^TOQ Ling 8| 9 H ^.—Captain-General; 2 a. This office is U3u*lly filled by Prijioes or pther dignitaries of the Court. 899.— Hu KtjN Ts^i^-LiNQ i| ^ S ffi.— Lieut -Colonel; 3 a. 399.— Hu KuN HiAO ^ !|| ^.-r-Lieutenant; 6 ^ 400.— Wei Shu Hu JLui? Hiaq ^ H^ Q $ :g^.— Sub- lieutenant; 8 b. 401 ,— Ts^iEN F%G YiNQ |J ^ ^.-^Y^Pgnard Divisiop. *' The Vanguard or leading division is composed entirely of M9,nchus or Mongols of the whole Eight Banners, chosen in the proportion of two to every tsoMng; it is divided into right and left wings, each of which is under a t^ung-ling^^ ( The Army of tlie Chinese Empire^ see Chinese Repository, Vol. XX, p. 264.) r 402.— Tso YiH Ts'iEN F^NG T^uNG-LiNG and Yeq Yih Ts'iEN Feng T'ung-ling &:Q % M M^ ®* — Commandants of the Left and Right 'Wing of the Vanguard division ; 2 a. 403.— Ts^^EN Feng She Wei jj ^ f^ g|,— Ipciperial QuardsT man of th^ Vanguard division ; 4 a. 404,^Wi|i 85U Ts^tpr nm &m Wei # * tJ gi ^ Ig.-^ Deputy dp. do,; ^ b. 405.-rrTa^iEjr FliNa Hiao |i^ fSt iK'—^Sergeant of the Vaaguard division; 6 a (and Wd Shu do. do.; B b). 406.— Pu KuN YiNG ^ H g.— (See Govermnent of PeUng^ Part IV, No. 347). 407.— Hwo K^i YiNG 9i S g.— The Artillery and Musketry .Divi«ion. Ggnalstjng in Nui and Wai^ of Inner and Outer Divisions, of which the former -is stationed at Peking and the latter at Lan^tien Chiang or <Jie Indigo Manufactory, a short distance from Y%n Ming Yuan. The Ifui Hwo KH Ying is formed from the bo'i of the different Banners (see supra. No. 379). At the PPQ^Q* day this mtl^^j like the " light Division " (see infra j No. 4 1 1 ) has but a nominal exjgtence» 408.^TsuNp T*yNQ H j|J..-^General Commandant. \ 56 PART VL-^THi: MANCHU MILITARY ORGANIZATION. 409. — YiH Chang ^ g.— Brigadier ; 3 a. 41 0. — YiNG TsuNG {gf H* — Commandant. The remaining ranks as in the Hu KUn Ying. 411.— KiEN Jul YiNG fl fSt S- — Light Division. Banks as above. Quartered near the Hiang Shan Yuan ^ |ll ^, or Tsing I Yuan j^JiCH? *h® Imperial Hunting Park, north-west of Peking. 41 2.— HiANG Tao Ch^u 8f 51 JS-— The Guides. A depart- ment which fiimishes the outriders, etc, for imperial progresses. 41 3. — Hu Ts^iANG YiNG J^ It g. — The marksmen for tiger hunts. 414.— Shang Yij Pei Yung Ch^u J: U flS M ft-— The Imperial Hunting Department. 415.— Sh6n Ki Ying H H flf.— The Peking Field Force. This force, comprising the 61ite of the Banner troops of the capital, was organized, in 1862, as a result of the disastrous campaign of 1860, with a view to provide for the future defence of the centre of government. The title given to the force was borrowed from the history of the Ming dynasty, when, on the first introduction of fire-arms in the 15th century, the designation SUn Ki or ''divine mechanism'' was attributed to the new engines of warfare. The Field Force numbers some 18,000 or 20,000 men, / including cavalry, artillery, and rifle regiments, aU of whom are drilled and manoeuvred after the European fashion. The instruc- tion of these troops is based upon the lessons in European drill which were given to detachments sent to Tientsin for the purpose of studying under British instructors in 1862-1865. 41 6.— Yuan MiNg YttAN Pa K'l H ^ H A K-— The Yuan Ming Division of the Banner Force. This is a corps composed of representatives of all the eight Banners, forming a sedentary garrison in the vicinity of the Summer Palace. , 41 7.— Chu Fang ft gjf • — The Manchu Garrisons outsidb Peking. Divided into three classes, as follows: — 418.— a. Ki Fu Chu Fang ^ |f ft gjjjf.— The. garrisons ; PART VI. — THE MANCHU MILITARY ORGANIZATION, 57 of the "military cordon," consisting of 25 cities in the province of Chihli, surrounding Peking.* The nine garrisons nearest to the capital are termed the Siao Kiu Ch^u h\% JL^^ or Nine Small Posts. The organization of these garrisons is the same with that of the Peking Banners, of which they are offshoots. 41 9.-6. Ling Ts^in Chu Fang I^ jglg gjf.— The garrisons of the Imperial Mausolea. In connection with these, also offshoots of the Peking Banners, are the following ranks : — 420. — TsuNG KwAN H ^. — Comptroller-General; 3 a. Has the chief command of the guard of the Mausolea. 421. — ^YiH Chang ^ ^. — Brigadier; 4 a. 422. — SzB KuNG-TSiANG rJ X g. — Oversccr of Works; 4 a! 423.— Fang Yu Kf |j.— Captain; 5 a. 424.— Tsi SzB kuNG YiNG KWAJF ^ JE ft H '&•— Commissary of Sacrifices ; 6 a. 425.— «. KoH ShSng Chu Fang # ig S Kf •— The garrisons stationed in the provinces, to wit, at Sui-yiian, Kwei-hwa, and T'ai-yuan Fu in Shandy at Ts^ng-chow Fu and Teh Chow in Shantung^ at K*ai-fBng Fu in Honan, at Nanking and King K^ow in Kiangsuy at Hangchow Fu and Cha-p^u in CMh-kiang, at Foochow in Fuhkien, at Canton in Kwangtung^ at Ch*eng-tu Fu in Sze-ch^wariy at King-chow Fu in Hupehj at Si-ngan Fu in Sliensiy and at Ninghia, Liangchow, and Chwang-liang T4ng in Kansuhy beside the garrisons of Urumtsi, Barkul, Ku-ch^Sng, and Turfan, included within the Kansuh jurisdiction. f 426.— TsiANG KuN ^ ^.— Manchu General-in-Chief (or "Tartar General"); 1 b. Lit. des. Ta Yuan Jung ^ % 3^- Note. — The Tsiang Kan exercising territorial jurisdiction in Manchuria and elsewhere are described as Military Governors. (See Part V, No. 367). The Tsiang KUn in the Chinese provinces ranks with, but before, the Governor-General, although exercising no authority except over the small Banner force at the head of which he stscnds. In Kwangtung and Sze-ch'wan he has a * See Chinese depository, Vol. XX, p. 314. f See Chinese Repository, Vol. XX, p. 318 et seq. 58 PART VI.— THE MANCHU MILITARY ORGANIZATION. bominal degree of control over the Ohinese foroes in addition to his own ; but this is not in practice exercised. 427.— Fu Tu-T^UNG gij ^ ]gj.— Manchu Brigade General; 2 a. Lit. des. Ta T^ung-che ^fz^M* ^^^ ^^ ®^^^ provincial command. For the Fu Tu-t^ung of the Peking Banner organization see sttprdj No. 881. 428. — HiEH-LiNG % ^.—Colonel; 3 b. One to each provincial Banner. 429. — Tso-LiNG ^ ^. — Major ; 4 a. {N.B. — A position appreciably higher than that of the tso-ling of the Peking banners, although with equivalent nominal rank.) 430. — Fang-yu g{f 1^. — Captain; 5 a. 431.— HiAO-K*i HiAO |g H :g.— Lieutenant; 5 b. 432.— Wei Shu Hiao-K^i Hiao ^ ^^ SS *S?.— Sub- lieutenant; 8 b. 433.— Ts^iEN-FfiNG Ijf jf.— Sergeant. 434. — LiNG-Ts*ui fS, HI- — Corporal. 435. — Shwei She Ying ^ ggi g. — Marine Battalion of the Banner Forces; for river service in the various provincial garrisons. 436. — Wei Ch'ang S J|[. — The Imperial Hunting Reserves. A vast tract of country, several hundreds of miles in extent, in the region of Jeh-ho, set apart in the early years of the reigning dynasty as a preserve for large game and as a place for the exercise of the Imperial troops in the art of war as exemplified in the chase. (See Part XI, No. 548.) The guards of the Hunting Reserves are placed under the command of the following officers :— 437._Wei Chiang Tsung Kwan H ^ ift If.— Chief Comptroller of the Hunting Grounds ; 3 a. 438.--WEt Ch'ang Tie Chang S ;^ ^ ^—Brigadier of the Hunting Grounds ; 4 a. PART VII. — THE CHINESE ARMY. 59 PART VIL-THE CHINESE ARMY. 439.— LuH YiNG ^ g.— The Chinese provincial Forces; designated as the Army of the Green Standard. These troops are divided into Luh Lu H jjj, or Land Forces, and Shuei She :^ fiS^ or Marine. The ranks and designations are identical in both divisions. The land forces, numbering in all some 400,000 to 500,000 men, are an absolutely effete organization, discharging the duties of sedentary garrisons and local constabulary, but superseded, on all occasions when active service is required, by the so-called '* braves" — yung ^, or irregulars, enlisted and discharged according to circumstances. The officers of these irregular troops are usually invested with rank as "expectants" of appointments to posts in the regular service. The main bulk of the provincial forces are commanded by a General-in-Chief or TH'tuh (see below), and bear the designation of TH Piao J§ i^, or TH-tufis command. A smaller body of men, to whom the duty of garrisoning the provincial capital is specially assigned, is known as the Fu Piao ^ g, being the command allotted to the provincial Governor; and a Governor- General has in addition a third distinct command annexed to his functions, this division receiving consequently the title of Tuh Piao § ^. The forces under the command of the General-in-Chief are divided into Chen-Piao |J| i^, or Brigades, and these again into Hieh ^, or territorial regiments. The Hieh are divided into Ying g, bat- talions, and the t/ing is farther subdivided into a right and left Shao jf^', or patrol. The f/ing is commanded, as a rule, by an officer of the rank of Major (see infrdj No. 444), although in some cases the commanding officer is only a first or second Captain. The shao is commanded by a tsHen-tsung or lieutenant, beneath whom the force is distributed in either two or four sze ^, corre- sponding to the sUn J^, or military posts established in different localities, at the head of each of which a pa-tsung "or sergeant is placed. As has already been stated above (see Part III, Nos. 60 PART VII. — THE CHINESE ARMY. 326 and 327) the Directors-General of the Yellow River and of the Grain Transport have each a separate military organization under their command designated, respectively, the Ho Piao fij ^ and Ts^ao Puzo iff S* The division under the orders of the Director of the Grain Transport has the duty of garrisoning and guarding the stations along the line of the grain transportation service at which the squadrons of junks are successively loaded, despatched, and discharged in effecting the conveyance of the "tribute rice" to Peking. These stations are designated wei ^ and so J^, according to the class to which they belong; and the officials in charge at these points, ranking as ahow^pei (second captain) and ta^ien-isujig (lieutenant), have special designations such as aJiaw yU «5P ^, "on service for garrison duty,*' f^ ling yiin fg ^, "charged with the conduct of the grain squadrons," etc., prefixed to the titles of their rank. In the river-guard squadron which has been organized of late year's for the patrol of the Yangtsze, under the name of Chiang Kiang Shuei She Ting ^ SC bfC 6$ §> forming a distinct command, the aze of the established land forces are repre- sented by tui |§|t, or gunboat companies. In other respects, the titles employed in this organization are the same with those of the regular army, which are as follows : — 440. — T^i TUH jg 'If. — Provincial Commander-in-Chief, or General-in-Chief; 1 b. Common des. tH-fai ^ •§ ; Epist. style, hnn m^ ^ H- " 441. — TsUNG-PiNQ H ^.-—Brigade General; 2 a. Common des. CMn-i^ai SR -^. Lit des. Tsung Jung ^ 3^; Epist des. Ta Tsung^-che :f; H ff • 442.— Fu-TSIANQ g)J JRf. — Colonel; 2 b. Lit des. Fu Jung gl| 3^; Common des. Hieh^t^ai ^ ■^. 443. — Ts^AN-TSiANG ^ JRp. — Lieutenant-Coloncl ; 3 a. Lit. des. Ts^an Jung ^ 5^; Common des. Ts^an Fu ^ J^. The Lieutenant-Colonel acting as Commandant of a Fu Piao or Governor's Brigade is colloquially designated Ta THng ^ 10. 444.— Yeo-Ki ^ y. — Major; 3 b. Lit des. Yeo Jung M ^ 9 Common des. Yeo Fii^ ]^. 445. — Tu-SZB ^ 3.— First Captain; 4 a. Lit. des. Tu KwSn IP Hg. PART Vn. — THE CHINESE ARMY. 61 446.— Show-pet «gp fl|.— Second Captain; 5 b. Common des. Show Fu If ^. 447._Ts^iEN-TsuNG ^ j||.— Lieutenant; 6 a. Lit. des. Ts^ien Jung ^ 3^ ; Common des. Tsung Yeh ^ ^. 448.— Pa-tsung ^ H.— Sergeant; 7 a. Common des. Fu Yeh glj |g. 449. — Wai-wei Ts*ien-tsung 9^^^ ift.— -Second Sergeant 8a. 450. — Wai-wei Pa-tsung Jfr ^ JC H- — Corporal; 9 a. 451. — NGfeH-WAi Wai-wei S 9f% (ll* ^.— Lance-Corporal ; 9 b. 452. — YiNG TsuNG g H. — Commandant. This title is given to the officers in command of special bodies of troops, such as the Manchu contingents employed in Sungaria, and the irregulars or "braves," chwang yung ^ ^, who have superseded the regular army organization for purposes of active service, together with the divisions or contingents of these irregulars which have been subjected to drill and furnished with arms on the European model. These are ordinarily designated lien kiln |f[ ^, a term which may be translated as "field force." 453. — Chung KiJN »}» ^. — Adjutant or Military Secretary. This post is filled by an officer of the rank of Colonel, Lieutenant- colonel, Major, or first or second Captain, according to the position of the authority under whose orders it is established. The officers who serve as Adjutants to Governors- General and Governors are, respectively, the commandants of the Governor-Generars and the Governor's brigades (see suprdy No. 439). In the general araiy organization, each commanding officer, down to the rank of major, has an officer of the rank immediately below him as his adjutant, except in the case of the General-in-Chief, who makes his own selection for the post. 62 PART Vni. — HEREDITARY RANKS, /-" PART VIII.-HEREDITARY RANKS, TITLES OP HONOUR, AND DECORATIONS. 454. — TsioH Yin |$ $. — Hereditary Banes. The existing Chinese system of conferring patents of nobility and honorary titles is linked by an unbroken chain of descent with the history of the feudal states of the sixth century before Christ, perpetuating in its nomenclature, on the one hand, the titles of the semi-independent Princes of that era, and, on the other, the names of official degrees which have ceased for many centuries to exist in practical operation. Inasmuch, however, as the feudal system has scarcely at any period shewn symptoms of revival since it was laid low by She Hwang Ti in the 3rd century B.C., the titles now conferred are not to be regarded as other than official distinctions of a peculiar class, and cannot rightly be considered as bestowing aristocratic position or privilege in the European sense. The nine degrees of nobility, indeed, which are conferred at the present day, and which are either heritable within certain limits — site siJi jft ^ — or hereditary for ever, — she sVi wang ^ ^* "K fi S § — ^^® granted exclusively as rewards for military services. The titles from the highest to the third degree, as set forth in the following table, are designated Ch^ao PHn j^ |{p, or " excelling rank " : — 455. — She Tsioh •{£ ||. — Hereditary Nobility. RANKS. Of each of these five ranks, which are some- times rendered in English by the titles duke, marquis, earl, viscount, and baron, there are y three classes or degrees. To the titles of the first, second, and third ranks, laudatory (kia ming jft^) are appended, significative of the special services by which the rank has been earned, vi. ICing Ch^e Tu-yiX H i$ iP M« vii. K'i Tu ri2 jg i 1^. i. Kung ^ ii. How j^ iii. Fell i(x iv. Tsze ^ V. Nan 15 TITLES OF HONOUR, AND DECORATIONS. 63 viii. YUn KH r« g H ^. ix. NgSn KH Yu ,g, jg ^. All the above titles, the ninth excepted, are hereditary during a specified number of lives, ranging from 26 for a Kung of the first class to 1 for a Yan KH Yu, The lower titles, beginning with No. 6, have occasionally the degree next above them "annexed*' {Kien ^), the bearer being thus enabled to rank "with, but after," possessors of the title immediately preceding. Any one of the above titles may be conferred posthumously {tsing ^) on ofiicers killed in battle, and thus become hereditary. Beside this, a form of reward for meritorious public servants is provided in the shape of hereditary official rank bestowed upon the sons, grandsons, younger brothers, or nephews, with due regard to seniority, of the person whom it is thus seen fit to distinguish. This form of reward is termed Nahi Yin J@, ^. By a special enactm^t, moreover, officials whp may lose their lives at sea or on any of the inner waters whilst engaged in the public service, are entitled to receive posthumous titles of honour according to their degrees of rank, and official rank is furthermore bestowed upon the eldest son of any such individual. This is designated Nan Yin ||| ]^ (hereditary distinction conferred as a reward for suffering in the public service). 456.— FliNG TsMg ^ H.— Titles of Honour. The system of conferring titles of honour is one of the most frequent forms of reward for merit or service, or of Imperial bounty on occasions of rejoicing. These titles may either be conferred — aJww |g — upon an official in person, or bestowed — feng ^ — upon his wife, or his parents or grandparents, whilst still living, or, lastly, they may be granted as a posthumous distinction — taing ^ — to his deceased progenitors. The patents by which these titles are conferred are designated Kao Ming |§ ^ for all ranks from the 1st to the 5th inclusive, and Ch^e Ming j^ ^ for all the inferior ranks. The following are the titles conferred upon civilian functionaries or their connections, in the various degrees of rank : — 64 PART VIII. — HEREDITARY RANKS, Title of Functionary. Wife's Title. 1 a. Kwang Luh Ta Fu *i»:fc*] — 55 * A 1 b. Yung Luh Ta Fu S5fi*^ ) ^»* ^'^^ ^" •^^^• 2 a. Taze Ch^g Ta Fu Sflgtlfc*]. — i5 * A 2 b. T'ung FSng Ta Fu 5i*:fc^) Urh FHn Fu Jen. 3 a. r^wn(7 7 Ta Fu 5i%^*) Jli A 3 b. Chung I Ta Fu t^Wi^^) Shuh Jen. 4 a. Chung Hien TaFu +3R:fc*l M A 4 b. a^ao I Ta Fu |a«:fc*) ^""S' «^^^ 5 a. F^g Ching TaFu H^}^^^) !£ A 5 b. FSng Chih Ta Fu *|iL**]/ JSn. 6 a. a^% m Lang ^ ^ &^\ ^ A 6 b. Ju Lin Lang • fl| ^ fiB ) ^?<3in Jin. 7 a. TF^ Zfn Lang 'iC W ^\ 81 A 7 b. Ch'ing She Lang ^ ft $^] Ju Jin. 8 a. /Sm ChUi Lang Ht M &^\ A £ HI A 8 b. Siu Chih TsoLang ifH^ifPa F'in Ju Jin. 9 a. r% 5A« Za«y a ft J^) ^d'p 81 A 9 b. Ting Site TsoLang Sft ^j^J ) Kiu FHn Ju Jin. ' Note. — Officials of the class of Li Yuan ^ P, i.«., such as have gained admission into the public service, by examination, from among the ranks of the clerks, shu pan ^ H^, in the Govern- ment Boards at Peking, may receive the following titles of honour: — 6 a. Saan Tih Lang Jg (g J^. 7 a. SUan I Lang ^ V^ $^. The titles exhibited in the foregoing list are set forth in all historical State papers and family records, on funeral cards, ancestral tablets, and tombstones. They are also frequently displayed on ornamental boards placed over the entrances to dwelling-houses. The patents . (referred to above) are inscribed on long scrolls of damasked silk, woven in five colours, with figures of the phoenix in relief, upon which the particulars of TITLES OF HONOUR, AlTD DECORATIONS. , 65 the grant are inscribed saccessively in the Chinese and Manchu languages. Military officials receive similar patents conferring honorary titles of a martial character. The first and second degrees of rank are invested with the title tsiang kUn ^ ^, to which appropriate epithets are prefixed, whilst the lower degrees receive the titles Tu Yn $Si ]^, K}i Yu J|f JH", and Hiax> Yu ^ ^ with similar prefixes. 457» — Shanq Kung % ^. — Distinctions for Merit. Although rewards for distinguished service, or marks of Imperial favour, the conception of which resembles in some degree that of the European system of Boyal or national Orders and medals of distinction, are to be found in China, nothing in the shape of an actual Order of Merit, approximating to th6 European type, has been adopted by the Chinese Government. In Japan, on the contrary, as is well known, an Order of the European kind was instituted in 1875, with the designation HUn Ting Shang P^ai W^ ^ H ^ ^^^ '^^ various classes of decoration. The term kUn p^ai ^ j[$ was at the same time selected to denote the medals which it was decreed should be awarded for military services. Isolated distinctions* have indeed been conferred in China on foreigners of various nationalities, principally for services rendered in the command of drilled troops during the Taiping rebellion, and subsequently in the collection of the Customs' revenue, which are known, with reference to the European term "star," by the designation pao sing ^ £; but as these are bestowed, for the most part, by provincial authorities, and without the sanction of any established rule or recognized statutes, such as are required to constitute what is commonly known as an "Order," the badges thus conferred can scarcely be regarded as having a real value as authentic marks of distinction. The Imperial decorations for merit established under the reigning dynasty are as follows : — 458. — HiNG KwA fj ^.— The Eiding-cape. This distinction, the most coveted form of reward for military PART VIII. — HEREDITARY RANKS, services, is better known as the Hwang Ma Kwa XJ[§^ or Tellow Riding Jacket, although this is but one form of the privileged style of dress. According to the Imperial regulation, the Cape, which is worn only when in personal attendance upon the sovereign in the field, or upon journeys, is of the colour of the Banner to which the Princes, nobles, or other members of the Banner force upon whom it is conferred, may belong. Officers of the Body-guard and Ministers of the Presence are, however, entitled to wear a yellow cape, irrespectively of their Banner: and in general, at the present day, the Yellow Riding Jacket is the form in which the distinction is commonly bestowed. It has been awarded to two Europeans, to Lieutenant-Colonel Gordon, R.E., for his services in contributing to the defeat of the Taiping rebels in Kiangsu, and to M. Prosper Giquel, for his labours in establishing the Arsenal at Foochow, coupled with previous military services. In this connection may also be noted the privilege of " riding within the precincts of the Imperial Palace*' — Taze Kin Ch'Sng niii k^i ma fl^ ^ ^ ^ M ^ — ^^^ bestowal of which is termed ahang ch^ao ma ^ ]||] j^. This is an honorary distinction, fre- quently conferred upon eminent public functionaries, who become thus entitled to proceed on horseback, instead of on foot, for some distance within the outer gateways of the Palace when summoned to an audience. 459. — Ling Che ^ ^. — The Feather, or Plume. The principal form of distinction for public service under the reigning dynasty. It is classed in different degrees as follows: — 460.— A. K'uNG TsiOH Ling JL ^ fiH-— The Peacock Feather. This decoration is arranged in the following classes: — 461.— i. San Yen Hwa-ling H 8ft ?E ^•— The Three- Eyed Peacock Feather — a distinction conferred only upon Imperial princes or nobles of the higher degrees, or for the most signal military achievements. 462. — ii. Shwang Yen Hwa-liNq H 8ft ?B ^- — The Double- Eyed Peacock Feather — conferred upon dignitaries of intermediate rank or degree of merit. TITLES OF HONOUR, AND DECORATIONS. 67 463.— iii. Tan Yen Hwa-ling M^^ ^.— The Single- Eyed Peacock Feather (commonly called Hwa-ling ^ ^ alone). This distinction is bestowed as an ordinary form of reward for public service, and during the last few decades has been indis- criminately obtainable by purchase. 464.— B Lan Ling ]g ^.— The Blue Plume, colloquially termed, from its glossy blue-black tint, Lao-kwa Ling^ or the Crow Feather. This distinction is attributed by regulation to the rank and file of the Imperial guards (see No. 98), and is conferred as a reward for services upon officials below the sixth degree of rank: It is not to be confounded with the sable-tail tiao wei U J8 (often erroneously termed fox-tail) badge which soldiers are entitled to wear when employed on active service. This badge is stated to have been introduced, originally, as a part of the uniform worn on the Imperial hunting expeditions. It is now commonly worn by all soldiers as an addition to their unifoi^. 465. — Pa-t'u-lu E» H #• — The Bat'uru Distinction. The Military distinction called in Chinese Pa-t^u-lu (a repre- sentation of the Manchu word bdt^uru^ signifying "brave") is an institution dating from the early years of the present dynasty, and is conferred solely for active service in the field. It consti- tutes an order of merit partaking of some of the characteristics of the French Ligion dlionneur ; but its special feature of difierence from a European order consists in the fact that it has no outward mark of decoration to be worn by its possessor, in. the place of which there can only be reckoned the distinguishing word (or title) which is assigned to each recipient on the bestowal of the order. These specific titles may be either Manchu, Mongolian, or Chinese, the Manchu being considered the most honourable. Under this system an officer upon whom the distinction is con- ferred might receive the designation YVi Yung Pa-t^u-lu |jS H ^ B i^, or "Bat^uru with the title Magnanimous Brave," and so forth. The title carries with it the right to wear the peacock- feather (see No. 463), although it seldom happens at the present day that the peacock-feather, lavishly awarded as this decoration has been of late years, is not obtained previously to the bestowa 68 PABT Vni. — HBBEDITABY BANKS, &C. of the Bdt^uru; and the allowances of the bearer, when employed on active service, are considerably enhanced in virtue of his possession of the title. The Bdt'uru has been conferred upon at least one European, Mr. W. Mesny, a native of Jersey, for services rendered in the province of Kwei-chow. 466.— KuNG P'ai 3^ m.— The Soldibb's Medal. This is an oblong plate of thin silver, having the character Shang Jjd (reward) embossed upon it, which is bestowed at reviews and inspections upon meritorious soldiers. PABT IX.— EXAHINATIOlTS AND OFFICIAL DEGREES. 69 PART IX.-EXAMZNATIONS AND OFFICIAL DEGREES. 467. — K^AO She ^ ((. — The Chinese system of competition for civil and military degrees, which famish successful candidates with a passport to the public service, is organized in three principal gradations, under the following names: Hiang She ^ fi(, the Provincial Examinations, held as a rule triennially, in the autumn, followed by the Hwei She ^ SC^ or Metropolitan Examination, held at Peking in the ensuing spring, and Tien She B ^, or Palace Examination, at which the final award of degrees is obtained. Special examinations, granted in celebration of auspicious public events, are denominated Ngin She J9; |S(, or Examinations by Imperial Grace, in addition to the regular triennial occasions. The ^^ classes'' of graduates at the Hiang She and Hwei She respec- tively are termed h^o ^ and hia ^, whence the meaning of ^^ literary graduation " has come to be applied to these terms combined in a single phrase. The following are the ranks successively obtained under this all-important system : — 468.— TAXING Sheng j| ^.—Student. The students of each district throughout the Empire undergo a series of preliminary examinations, before the Magistrate of their own district, the Prefect within whose jurisdiction they are placed^ and the Literary Chancellor of the province, before qualifying for entrance at the triennial provincial competition. A certificate of merit from the District Magistrate enables the candidate for literary honours to term himself ^^un^ sheng ^ which may be regarded as equivalent to Student. The candidate who is ranked first on the Magistrate's list has the distinguishing title of Ngan SIiow jf^ *|^. A person before competing for the right to term himself t'ung shSng is designated, in complimentary parlance, tsiln siu ^ ^, which may be rendered "man of promise." 469.— Siu Ts*ai H :^. — Licentiate. In every second year the Literary Chancellor of each pro- 70 PART IX. — EXAMINATIONS AND OFFICIAL DEGREES. • vince completes a tour of his domain, holding examinations — ngan-lin ^ E£ — at the different Prefectural cities. Candidates who are successful on these occasions obtain their first degree, and become entitled siu-ts^ai, which may be rendered Licentiate. The highest on the list receives in this category, likewise, the title ngan-sliow (see above). The general literary and official desig- nation for the siu'-ta^ai class is sheng-yUan ^ g. Two categories are formed by the division of the successful candidates into those of the "established list/' termed fu sheng ^ ^, and those of the "supplementary list," or tseng sheng jl§ ^, the first class repre- senting the number of degrees accorded by the ancient regulations, and the second those who are admitted under more recent ordinances, extending, for one reason or another, the number of degrees obtainable. 470. — Lin Shan ShI&ng ]j| J^ ^.—Salaried Licentiate. A limited number of siu-ts^ai are annually admitted to the position of tin sli^g ^ ^, or lin shan slieng, so called from the stipends {kao hwo ^ iPj) which they receive from govemmerit {"unds. 471. — KuNG ShSng % ^.—Senior Licentiate. In addition to the privilege described above, a farther series of advantages remain open to the licentiates who fail to obtain this position or to pass for a degree at the provincial examinations. Special examinations, granted as an act of imperial grace (see suprdy No. 467), enable a certain number otsiu-ts^ai to attain the position of ngin kung-slieng ,§, Jf 4. An examination recurring once in twelve years gives access to the grade of pa kung-sheng fjt^ &9 which qualifies for admission to the metropolitan competition. Simple seniority admits a certain number of unsalaried licentiates to the grades of fu kung-sheng glj ^ ^, and sui kung-shSng ^ 3( ^ ; whilst for meritorious achievements at periodical examinations a certain number receive the title of yeo kung-sk^g fl| ^ ^. After the degree of fu sheng (see No. 469) has been reached, that of fu kung-shing P§ 9 £ or accessory Senior Licentiate may be obtained by purchase. PART IX. — fiXAMINATIOlTS AND OFFICIAL DEGREES. 71 472. — Ku-jfiN 9( A. — Provincial (Ku-j^n) Graduate. This degree, which forms the first substantial reward of a student's ambition, is conferred at the Hiang Slie (see suprdy No. 467). Lit. des. Hiao-lien ^ jjj^. Licentiates of one or other of the primary degrees described above assemble at the provincial capital in the eighth moon of every third year (or more frequently on special occasions offering), to compete under the auspices of the Examiners appointed from Peking (see in/rdy No. 479). Of some ten to twelve thousand competitors, commonly described as slie tsze i •? ^^ scholars, barely 300 at the utmost are admitted to degrees, the number of which is limited by regulation. The successful graduates, whose names appear upon the official list, termed the Lung Hu Pang H J^ 1^, are said to have chung ku if> jfi — attained their degree — and are thenceforward known as ku-jSuy or ''promoted men." Their next step is to proceed to the capital, early in the following year, to compete at the Metropolitan Examination for the superior degrees (see below). Li addition to the actual list of graduates, about forty of the candidates, whose performances are adjudged as not inferior in merit to those of their selected competitors, are admitted to a secondary list, entitled fupang gi| ^ — a description oi proximd acceasit — by which means their names obtain the honour of publicity although they have failed to secure the degree competed for. The highest on the list of graduates receives the honorary title of kiei yUan ^ yQ; and the five individuals next in order are entitled king kw^ei ^ ^. For the encouragement of study, it is farther provided that ku-jen graduates who shall have attended three successive examinations — san ¥o H ff — for the tsin she degree (see below), without actually passing, shall be allowed to appear before a Commission of Selection, Ta T^iao ^j^ ^, which is appointed triennially after each metro- politan examination. On this occasion, a limited number of appointments to the rank of District Magistrate, and some minor offices at Peking, together with sundry nominations to the rank of Kiao Kwan ^ '^ ov district officers of instruction (see Part III, Nos. 303-306), are conferred upon the most approved candidates. 72 PART IX. — EXAMINATIONS AND OFFICIAL DBGRBBS. KH'jin graduates are entitled by regulation to an official entertainment at which an ode of the Book of Poetry, entitled the Luh Ming |g l]^, should be chanted. The banquet is accordingly known by this name. As a special mark of respect for old age, it is farther ordained that a kii-jen graduate who shall reach the sixtieth anniversary of his examination, thus completing an entire cycle according to the Chinese reckoning, shall "repair a second time to the Luh Ming banquet" — Cheung fu Luh Ming fi ^ ^ ^ — for which purpose certain ceremonies and imperial donations are prescribed. The kil'jen degree is also bestowed as an honorary reward upon candidates above the age of 80 or of 90, who have presented themselves at repeated examinations without passing, and who comply with certain specified requirements. 473. — TsiN She jH i. — Metropolitan Graduate. This degree is obtained at Peking, by triennial (or special) competition among the ku-jen assembled from the provinces, to the number of about six thousand, out of whom some 325 to 350 obtain a successful result. The provincial graduates, or ku taze ^ -^F, after assembling at the capital early in the Spring following the examinations at which they have severally passed, are required to undergo a test examination, fu «Ae J| gj, which qualifies them for admission to the Hwei She ^ |^, or metropolitan competition. The graduates who prove successful at this examina- tion become entitled kwig she ^ j; during the period which still intervenes between the publication of the lists and their final competition. This takes place within the precincts of the Imperial Palace itself, and is hence called Tien She ^ gj, or Palace Exa- mination. The essays written on this occasion are scrutinized and classified by a special Commission of Imperial Eevisers, entitled Yiieh Kuan Ta Ch^Sn B9 ^ ;^ S* According to their order of merit, as ascertained by this crowning test, the graduates now receive, usually in the proportion of about one in three, admission into the ranks of the Hanlin, or College of scholars par excellence (see Part II, No. 201). The highest in order of merit are distinguished by various titles, as seb forth below; and the PABT IX. — EXAMINATIONS AND OFFICIAL DEGREES. 73 remainder are classed as tsin sJie of three classes ( — kia ^ , see below). Some days after the publication of these awards, a fresh competition, entitled Ch^ao K'ao ^ ^, or the Court Examination, is held in the Palace, a theme selected by the Emperor himself being given out for the compositions required. The graduates are subsequently admitted to audience, whereupon a certain number belonging to the second and third classes of the graduates are honoured with the title shu hi slie, or Bachelor of the Hanlin (see Part II, No. 210); the remainder, as idn she^ receive appoint- ments either to provincial ofEces, as District Magistrates in ex- pectancy, or to minor ranks in connection with the Six Boards at Peking. 474. — Chwang Yuait ^ jj;.— Optimus. The title conferred at the Palace Examination (see above) on the most approved scholar among the competing metropolitan- graduates. The recipient of this, the highest literary award, becomes entitled to enter upon the rank of Han^lin Yuan Siu Chwan (see Part II, No. 207). To have produced a chwang yUan is rejoiced in as a lasting honour by the disti;ict whence the fortimate candidate proceeds. 475.— Pang Yen Ijj^ B|. — Secundus. The title conferred upon the graduate ranked second in order of merit at the Palace Examination (see suprdy No. 473). 476.— T^AN HwA Jg ^!g.— Tebtius. The candidate who secures this distinctive title, together with the Pang Yen (see above), becomes invested with the rank of Pkn Siu (see Part II, No. 208). The two together constitute, in company with the Chwang-yUanj the first class, yih kia — ^, of the year, and are designated tsin-she kih ti jH it !?S^ SIf* 477. — Oh^wan Lu ^ ]||. — QuAETus. This title is bestowed upon the candidate graduating at the head of the second class, urh kia JH ^, at the Palace Examina- tion. The remainder of this class take rank as Shu Ki Site (see Part II, No. 210). They are designated tem-sJie eh^u ah&n j^ j; |{{ $[[. The designation i^ung tein'-ahe ch^u ehen |3 jft db ttl ^ ^^ 74 PART IX. — EXAMINATIONS AND OFFICIAL DEGREES. bestowed upon the graduates of the third and last class^ of whom the highest take rank as Shu Ki She and the remainder simply as tsin she. ^^*^ Examinations for military degrees follow precisely th« same course and give access to the same degrees as those for the civil career, with the character wu (military) prefixed. Examina- tions are likewise held for Manchus qualifying as interpreters {/an-yih ^ gj) in the language of their race, and who receive degrees as in the ordinary literary course. 478.— HiAO Lien Fang ChIing ^ ^ # jE- — Worthies of Literature. This is an honorary title bestowed by Imperial grace on obscure scholars who are specially recommended by provincial authorities for examination and the bestowal of official rank, in conformity with ancient precedent. The following are the most important among the titles employed in connection with the Literary Examinations: — 479.— ChSng K^ao Kwan jE ^ 'g. — Chief Examiner; the president specially appointed for each provincial or metropolitan examination. For the provincial examinations, Vice-Presidents of the Metropolitan Boards or Courts are selected; whilst for the examinations at Peking, a Grand Secretary or President of a Board is named as Chief Examiner. Lit. des. Ta Taung Ts^ai :K; IB ^ ; Common des. Ta Chu JS^ao 5!C i ^• 480. — Fu K^AO Kwan g|| ^ ^ ^Assistant Examiner; appointed to assist the functionary above named. Lit. des. Fu Tmng Ts^ai M M Ml Common des. Fu Chu K'ao gjl i ^. 481 .— T^UNG K*A0 Kwan (^ ^ ^.—Associate Examiners ; Common des. Fang Kwan '^ ^. 482.— Nui KiEN She Kwan p) £ £{ 1^. — Lispectors. 488.— Nui Show Chang Kwan ft Jlfc S ^.—Deputy Examiners. The above classes of officials constitute tlie Nui lAen ft jH, or Inner Precinct of the Examinations. The Wai Lien ^ |j|, or Outer Precinct, comprises the following list of functionaries: — PABT IX. — EXAMINATIONS AND OFFICIAL DEQREEB. 75 484, — KiBN LiN KwAN ^ (g ^. — Supervisor. This office is filled in the provinces by the Governor, who is said on this occasion to juh wei \ JfUj^j or "confine himself within the precincts," i.e., of the Examination Hall. At Peking the office is filled by a functionary selected from among the Directors of the various Courts. Lit. des. Che Kung Ku ^ ]| 9^. 485.— T^i-TiAO • KwAN H IH ^.—Proctor; the official charged with the general supervision and control of the candidates during the examination. 486.— Wai Kien-she KwaN 9h |S SC §. — Comptroller of the Outer Precinct. 487. — Wai Show Chang Kwan ^ IK J|E 'g.— Receiver of the Essays. 488.— Mi FfiNG Kwan ^ f^ 'g.— Sealer of the Essays. 489.— T^liNG LuH Kwan 0^1^.— Transcriber of the Essays. 490.— Tui TuH Kwan 3^ H 'g.— Comparer of the Essays. 491.— Yin Kuan Kwan pp § 'g.— Stamper of the Essays. The five above-named offices are filled by appointments from among Secretaries of the Boards who have themselves taken their degree. Beside the above, a number of additional posts exist in connection with the police and internal management of the Examination Halls, to which special appointments are made, as in the foregoing instances, at each recurring period. 491a. — Shan Chang jIj ^. — President of a College. This title is bestowed upon the officials who ar^ employed to superintend the studies prosecuted by advanced scholars at the various provincial capitals, usually those who have already acquired the hutr-jen degree, with a view to qualifying for the higher examina- tions. The institutions at which these studies are pursued are known as Shu YUan ^ J^, which may be rendered by the term ^^ College," and each has farther a distinctive name derived either from the locality in which it is situated or from some 76 PART IX. — EXAMINATIOJrS AND OFFICIAL DEGREES. classical quotation. The Colleges, of which one or more are to be found at each provincial capital, where they represent the position assigned at Peking to the Kwoh TszeKien (see Part II, No. 247), are in most cases endowed from the provincial revenues, and certain stipends are paid to the graduates who frequent them as well as to the tutors who are employed in their instruction. The chief superintendents, or shan change are frequently retired officials of high rank. By a decree of the Emperor K'ien Lung, which, however, is usually ignored in practice, the designation ahan chang was ordered to be exchanged for Yoan chang |^ ^j as a more dignified epithet than that popularly in use. PART X. — ^BUDDHISM AND TAOISM. 77 PART X.-BUDDHISM AND TAOISM. The Chinese official system, which allows no condition of the body politic to remain, in theory at least, unprovided with means for its control, includes among its administrative rules a complete scheme of ecclesiastical gradations of rank and authority in con- nection with the priesthood of both the Buddhist religion and the Taoist order. Whilst refraining from interference with the internal organization of either of these bodies, or with the admission of members to their ranks, the imperial Institutes provide a frame- work in harmony with the all-pervading official system, to be grafted upon the hierarchy as it is found in either case developed according to its own traditional rules. The complicated and costly organization of the Tibetan form of Buddhism, which has been created by the emperors of the reigning dynasty, is a subject entirely distinct from the more ancient and orthodox type which constitutes the religion par excellence of the Chinese people; and the Lamaist hierarchy is left aside in this place, to be separately dealt with in Part XII below. For the control of the Buddhist priesthood, official ranks are established according to the following scale: 492.— SfiNG LuH SzB ff ^ -g.— Superior. Two office-bearers invested with this title are appointed in each district, department, and prefecture throughout the Empire, as principal and deputy, the chief being distinguished as C/ieng Yin IE HI J or principal, and the second in order as Fu Yin g|J fp> or deputy, holder of the seal. The appointment is made by the local authority by selection from among the leading abbots {fang cliang ')J ft) of monasteries, and is submitted for approval, when made by subordinate officials, to the provincial government. The superior thus appointed acts as the medium of communication between the secular authorities and the priesthood, for whose general good conduct he is considered responsible, and over whom, in cases of litigation among themselves, he exercises certain judicial 78 PART X. — BUDDHISM AND TAOISM, powers. The Sing Luh Sze of the metropolitan district is a person enjoying much consideration and wielding no small amount of authority; but the position elsewhere is attended with little respect. Distinctive titles are held by the incumbents of the office, according to the rank of the territorial division to which they belong. These titles are as follows : 493. — SfiNG Kang ff iM. — Superior of the Buddhist priest- hood in a Fu or prefecture. The full title is Seng Kang Sze Tu Kang f^ IH 'i^ tf IN* The secondary degree of the ninth rank is assigned to holders of this office. 494. — SfiNG ChSng If J£. — Superior of the Buddhist priest- hood in a Chow or department. 495. — SfeNG HwEi ff ^.—Superior of the Buddhist priest- hood in a Hien or district Beside the foregoing, a certain number of ranks are provided by regulation, apparently for bestowal by way of distinction upon deserving members of the priesthood. They are but little, if at all, in use at the present day. The following is the list of these ranks as officially recognized : — 496.— Tso and Yeo Shan She £ ^ ft -jft.— Preceptor (principal and secondary) ; 6 a. 497.— Tso and Yeo Shan Kuo 2£ ^ W JR.— Preacher (principal and secondary) ; 6 b. 498.— Tso and Yeo Kiang King £ ^ 91 jg.— Expositor (principal and secondary) ; 8 a. 499.— Tso and Yeo Kioh I &7^9t H-— Clerk (principal and secondary) ; 8 b. For the control of the Taoist priesthood a similar organization is provided, centreing in the patriarch or hereditary chief of the order, the Heavenly Master Chang, or Cliafig T^ien She ^JifSHj in whose person the spirit of one of the earliest of the Taoist mystics is reputed to reside (see I7ie Chinese Reader's Manualj p. 11). The following are the ranks of the official Taoist hierarchy: — 500.— Tag Luh Sze ^ ^ ^.—Superior. An appoint- PART X. — BUDDHISM Al^D TAOISM. 79 ment corresponding in all respects with that of the Superior of the Buddhist order (see mpra^ No. 492). 501. — Tag Ki ^ J£. — Superior of the Taoist priesthood in a Fu or prefecture; 9 b. The full title is Tao Ki Sze Too Ki 502. — Tag CHfeNG JS J£. — Superior of the Taoist priesthood in a CAow or department. 503. — Tag Hwei ^ ^. — Superior of the Buddhist priest- hood in a Hien or district. In addition to the foregoing, a number of offices, with corre- sponding rank according to the Chinese official scale, are established with reference to the Taoist priests who are connected with the State temples devoted to the worship of the powers of Nature. Hiese are as follows: — 504.— TsG and Yeg Cheng Yih & 7^ j£ —.—Director (principal and secondary) ; 6 a. 505.— TsG and Yeg Yen Fah 2E © fS }§|.— Hierophant (principal and secondary); 6 b. Employed in performing the stated acts of sacrifice in the Imperial temples. 506. — TsG^and Yeg Che Ling 2£ ^ S ft.— Thaumaturgist (principal and secondary); 8 a. These "miracle-workers" are employed at the State temples in services specially intended as acts of propitiation in times of flood or drought. A corresponding office is filled by priests designated Yin Yang Cheng Shuh ^|S1E% in the temples dedicated to the presiding spirit (^Ch'eng Hwang Miao j^ (£ id) of prefectural cities. 507. — TsG and Yeg Che I ^ ^ 31 tl- — Priest of the lowest order (principal and secondary) ; 8 b^ 80 PART XI.— MONGOLIA AND TURKESTAN. PART XI.-MONGOLIA AND TURKESTAN. 508. — Wai Fan Jr[> j|f. — The Dependencies of the Empire. Under the institutes of the reigning dynasty, the bulk of the tribes composing the Mongolian nationality are primarily divided into two great classes, the Niii ^ and Wai ^ Mung Ku HI *]£?, or the Inner and the Outer Mongols. Both are placed under the control of the Li Fan Yuan or Mongolian Superintendency (see Part II, No. 183), together with the governments of the region of Hi, which includes Eastern Turkestan or Kashgaria, and of Tibet. Inner Mongolia is that portion of the Mongol territory which borders upon China Proper and Manchuria, along the whole of the north-eastern and eastern frontier. Outer Mongolia encloses the Inner region with a vast semi-circular sweep, and is itself con- terminous on the west and north with the territories of the Russian Empire. The Inner Mongols are otherwise known as those of the Forty-nine Banners, from the military divisions in which they are grouped. They represent, with the Ch^ahar tribe, which forms a separate organization (see infrciy No. 526), the sections of the Mongol race which were foremost in submitting to the Manchii invaders of China in the first half of the seventeenth century. The Outer Mongols comprise the Khalkha and Kalmuk (or Eleuth) and other tribes, which will be found treated of below (see infrd^ No. 516). 509.— Nui Mdng-ku ft ^ igf. — The Inner Mongols. The Forty-nine Banners of the Inner Mongols at the present day are directly descended from the organization adopted by the successors of Chinghiz Khan during their tenure of power as masters of the greater part of Asia, and continued by their descendants after the expulsion of the Yiian dynasty from the throne of China. The Mongols of the fourteenth century were organized in six grand divisions, known as the Djirgughan Tumen, or Six Ten Thousands, which again were arrayed in two sections, PART XI. — MONGOLIA AND TURKESTAN. 81 termed the right and left wings, the left occupying the eastern, and the right the western, half of the Mongolian territory. Apparently in imitation of this earlier system of organization, the Banners of the Inner Mongols are divided into six meng Jg, or leagues (Mong. chogolgdn), which embrace the whole of the twenty-four pu ^, or tribes (Mong. aimak §^ 311 j£) under which they are distributed. Before proceeding to elucidate the titles of the hereditary or appointed rulers of the Mongol tribes, a list of the various administrative divisions must be given. The transliteration of their respective names, as represented in Chinese characters, has been undertaken with special, although not invariable, deference to the authority of I. J. Schmidt, the translator of the chronicle of Ssanang Setzen, whose labours form, with the writings of D'Ohsson, the basis of the recent compilation entitled History of the Mongols; by Henry H. Howorth^ London^ 1876 — a work which may be usefully consulted for detailed information with reference to the Mongol tribes. 510. — I. Chbrim League 1. Khorch^n tribe 2. Djalaid 3. Turbet 4. Qhorlos 511. — II. Chosot'u League 5. Kharach^n tribe 6. T'umed „ 51 2. — III. Chad Uda League 7. Ao-khan tribe 8. Naiman 9. Barin 10. Djarud „ 11. Aru Khorch4n ,, 12. Ongniod ,, 13. Keshikhteng „ 14. Khalkha (one tribe from the left wing) J) j> >? >> )j eM?f:ai- mn^- 6 banners. fLiE#- 1 banner. *fc W f6 !|#. 1 » Mmmn- 2 banners. J$^il9§- ^mm ii^- 3 ,, ±mm- 2 „ 03 ,i H 91- ^w- 1 banner. ^M- 1 „ E W' 2 banners. JLnfift- 2 „ mm^m\i^- 2 „ ^"^A^- 1 banner. %i\'%m- 1 „ ^filS$£S- 1 » 82 PART XI.— MONGQLIA AND TURKESTAN. 51 3.— IV. SiLiNGHOL League ^ # IR ^ £. 15. Uchumuch^in tribe J^ 3|c iS iJS- 2 banners. 16. Khaochid n JS i # 2 „ 17. Sunid » iS ^ ift 2 „ 18. Abaga » P^ E I® 2 „ 19. Abaganar „ P^f B «& Ift li 2 „ 514.— V. Ulan Ch^ap League ^M^^ H- 20. Sze TszePuLoh tribe H •? ^ i^ or Durban Keuked „ 1 banner. 21. Mow Mingan „ :3g ^ ^ 1 „ 22. Urad » ,i 8H # 3 banners. 23. Khalkha (one tribe 1$ 1| ^ :& H 1 banner. from the right wing) 51 5.— VI. Ikh Chao League ^ jg BS 5|. 24. Ordos (Ortous) tribe fP If ^ ^ 7 banners. With the tribe of the Ordos there are amalsramated certain fragments of the Teamed tribe, occupying the region adjacent to Kwei Hwa Ch^eng, lying to the north-east of the Great Bend of the Yellow River. 51 6. — Wai Mung-ku ^ ^ igf . — The Outer Mongols. Outer Mongolia comprises the territory of the Khalkhas, extending from the north-eastern termination of the desert of Gobi (Sha-mo ^ ^) to the borders of Russian Siberia, and of the Kalmuks, or Western Mongols, otherwise known as Eleuths or Oelot. 517. — Khalkha V^ ^ ^.— The Khalkha nation comprises the tribes of the Mongols which, owing probably to their greater remoteness, maintained to a much later date than the tribes of the Forty-nine Banners, described above, their independence of the Manchu sovereignty. They constitute four great pu ^ or tribes, three of which are still governed by hereditary rulers bear- ing the title Khan (in Chinese, ^Han ff). The number of banners distributed among the four tribes is eighty-three, beside the two banners which, as is shewn above (see Nos. 512 and 514) have been incorporated with the Inner Mongols. By the addition of FART ZI.— UOKOOLIA AND TURKESTAN. 83 two banners of Oelots and one of Khoits, the number of the banners of the Khalkhas is brought up to 86 in alL The four great divisions bear the following names : i. The T^ushet^u Khanate ± IB ■ ff iS5 20 banners, ii. The Tsetsen „ ¥ E tt flS 23 „ ill. The Dzassakt'u „ JL S 3£ ■ ff IC 18 „ iv. The Sain-noin tribe H ^ IS ffl ^ 22 „ The town of Urga, or K*u-lun (Kurun) |^ |^, situated within the territory of the T^ushet^u Khan, is the administrative centre of the northern and eastern Khalkha tribes. It is the residence of the Cheptsun Dampa Hut*ukht*u (see Part XII, No. 598), a Lamaist dignitary of the most venerated order, through whose spiritual influence the Chinese Imperial Agent (see in/rd. No. 556) maintains his authority over the Khalkha chiefs. The Western Khalkhas, i.e., the Dzassakt^u and Sain-noin tribes, are under the rule of the Military Governor of Uliasut'ai (see i/j/Vd, No. 552). A chain of frontier posts, known as K'a-Iun -^ j^ {Kanin, called Caron, or Carou by a misprint, in the writings of the Jesuits of the last century), runs along the border of the Khalkha territory, where it adjoins the Russian possessions, and at each post a small military colony under a chief having the title cliang king ;§[ tJC (see Part VI, No. 385, and in/rd, No. 541) is established. The line of frontier is marked by piles of stones, called ob6 ^ fH, and the space intervening between two such frontier-marks is termed by the Mongols sahu m ^. The khans of the Khalkhas testify their allegiance to the Chinese sovereign by an annual presentation of tribute, designated as the Kiu Feh ^ ^ or Nine White [Animals], consisting of eight horses and a camel, all pure white in colour. Next in importance to the Khalkhas are the Kalmuks or Western Mongols — Eleuths, etc. — bearing six tribal designations as shewn below : — 518.— i. Oklot (Elbuth) jg # «r, or jg i^ #.— The Kalmuks or Western Mongols. The term Kalmuk (or Kalmuck) by which the Western 84 PABT XI. — ^MONGOLIA AITD TUBEXSTAK. Mongols are known to European authors, is unknown to the Chinese, who designate the leading tribes of this once powerful division of the Mongols by the name given above. Several derivations for the word Kalmuk have been suggested by different authors, whose speculations are assembled by Howorth {Hist of the Mongols, p. 497). In the word Oelot, which the French missionary authors of the last century transcribed as Eleuth, the Chinese themselves trace an obvious relationship with the Wa-la %i 8H (Wara, or Oirad), the designation applied to the leading tribe jsvith which the eariier sovereigns of the Ming dynasty warred and negotiated. Having overspread the region north of the T4en Shan, including the modern territory of Hi, the chieftains of the Oelot tribes founded, early in the 17th century, a dominion known as that of Sungar, or Dzungar fp |!§ 1^, which was eventually shattered by the arms of the Emperor K'ang Hi, and finally overthrown by the invasion of their territory (Sungaria) in 1757 by a Chinese and Manchu army despatched against them by the emperor KMen Lung. During the period of its independent existence, {lie Sungar nation was divided into four tribes, known to the Chinese as the four Weirad ^j Pjp) ^ ( Mong. Durben Oirad, said to signify the Four Allies) in which the perhaps derivative sounds of the Oelot or Oirad form of designation may clearly be recognized. Without entering here upon an enquiry into the dispersion and gradual reassembly of the Oelot tribes, a task more appropriately and fully dealt with elsewhere, the follow- ing enumeration of the remaining divisions of the Kalmuk tribes is proceeded with : — 519. — ii. TuRBET (Tourbeth) :H: ^ fjgf S#---A division of the Kalmuks or Oelot, now organized in two chogolgdn or leagues (see below). 520.— iii. TuRGUT (Tourgouth) Jfet W )! J^.— This large division of the Kalmuks is declared by the celebrated Chinese Minister of State, Sung Yiin, in his work (dated A.D. 1823) on the Mongol tribes, to be identical with the Turbets (see above) and to represent one of the four tribes or Wei rat of the Sungar nation (see No. 518). The Turgut now form five c/u>golgdn or leagues. PART XI. — MONGOLU AND TURKESTAN, 85 521. — iv. The Khoshoit ^ftHdif^. — A southern branch of the Kalmuks, whose principal seat is in the neighbourhood of Kokonor, although a part of them are found at present, constituting one chogolgdn, on the north-eastern frontier of China. 522. — V. The Khoit j^ ^. — A small tribe associated with the Khoshoit. 523.— vi. The Ch^oros ^ ^ ^.— The sixth and last of the divisions of the Kalmuk tribes. 524.— Ts'iNG Hai Mung-ku iH f^ SIe tS*.— The Mongols OF Kokonor. The disintegration of the Western Mongols, as a result of the wars of the last century with Tibet and China, has caused repeated displacements to befall the various tribes, and has led to their being distributed under several distinct jurisdictions. Twenty-nine banners, all but one of which are of Kalmuk origin, are now seated in the region of Kokonor and on the northern borders of Tibet, in the territory anciently known as Tangut The following is the list of the tribes of Kokonor, who ar§ placed under the sway of the Imperial Controller General at Si-ning (see in/ra, No. 562) :— , , , Khoshoit ../ ... ... ••• ... 21 banners. 1. ii. Ch'oros iii. Khoit iv. Turgut V. Khalkha 525. — Alashan Mung Ku pl ^ OF Alashan. jj 1 banner. 4 banners. 1 banner. |g "jSf. — The Mongols These are the tribes settled in the region north of Ning-hia in the province of Kansuh and along the Western Bend of the Yellow River, extending as far as the western extremity of the Great Wall and the desert of Gobi. They are Kalmuks by descent. Four tribes, of those already enumerated above, have formed offshoots in the region tributary to the Prince of Alashan PjIIJe; HIK 2, constituting 3^ banners in all, distributed as follows : 86 PART XI. — MONGOLIA AND TURKESTAN. i. Si T^ao Oelot TS^ E^ #.— The Oelots of the Western Bend of the Yellow River. ii. EdsinS Turgut is $¥ IB ± W S ^.— The Turguts of the river Edsine or Edsinei. iii. Turret ij^ J^ i^ !|#. — A portion of the Turbet tribe. iv. Khoshgit ft ^ !|f .—As above. . 526. — Yeo Muh ^ 4Sl- — The Herdsmen Tribes. Under this designation the Chinese ofHcially class the Mongol tribes who are placed under the direct government of the high authorities of the frontier, and especially the Ch'ahar, to whom the territory lying in immediate proximity to the Great Wall, and nearest to the imperial capital, was assigned after they had sub- mitted themselves to the Manchu conquerors of China. Unlike the Mongols of the Forty-nine Banners, they are denied the privilege of being ruled by titular tsHn wang or Princes, but on the other hand they are organized under eight Banners on the same footing as the Manchu military forces. Their distinctive title of yeo muh or "nomade herdsmen" is derived from the interdict against engaging in agricultural pursuits, and their restriction to the pasturage of flocks and herds, which was imposed upon them by their new masters. Within their territory are situated the imperial pasturages, or muh ch'ang tfy^ J^, upon which the herds and flocks specially pertaining to the imperial house- hold and the stud department are reared. A recent enumeration Jaas given the number of about 100,000 horses, 7,000 camels, 200,000 sheep, and 12,000 horned cattle, upon these pasturages. The following are the tribes coming under the category of the nomade herdsmen. 527.— Ch^ahar ^ »& f|.— The Ch'ahar (or Ohakhar) tribe. (See suprdj No. 526, and infrd^ No. 550.) 628.— Bargu E W if.— The Bargu tribe. This tribe has been incorporated with the Ch^ahar, conjointly with whom, and a portion of the Oelot and T^umed tribes, who have similarly been annexed to the Ch^ahar, they are placed partly under the control of the military Lieutenant-Governor residing at Kalgan PART XI. — ^MONGOLIA AND TURKKSTAK. 87 (see tn/rd, No. 550) and partly under that of the military Lien- tenant-Governor of Jeh-ho (see vafra^ No. 548). 529. — Uriakghai % |j| ji||. — The tribes of Urianghai or Uriankai, the territory occupying the extreme north-west of the Chinese dominions, now placed tinder the administration of the Military Governor of Uliasutai (see tn/ra, No. 552). 530. — MiNGAD ^ |ig !($. — The Mingad, a small tribe of nomades, occupying the region north-east of Uliasutai. 531. — Djakch'in ft B^ j;(j,.— The Djakch4n or Dzakhach^in tribe, a remnant of the Sungar nation, associated with the fore- going. 532. — ^Hasak B& m jg.— The Khassak (Cossack) or Kirghis, identified by the Chinese with the K'ang-kii J^f J^ of antiquity, and probably the same with the Kankal or Kankar of western geographers. In 1757, the Khan of the Kirghis tendered his allegiance to the sovereign of China, on the annexation of the territory of Sungaria being completed. Sung Yiin, in the work already quoted from, describes the region inhabited by the Kirghis as bounded on the north by the Russian possessions, and on the south-west by the land of the Buruts ^ ^ ^ (known as the black Kirghis). They own allegiance, he farther observes, to 20 6t^ok fP fS ]£ or chieftains. Their rulers are known as 'jpi (pih) Jt, which he identifies with the term f|§ ^ or beg. 533.— BuRiAT a^ ffi iH ^.— The Buriat Mongols subject to Russia. Simg Yiin, in the work above mentioned (vol. i, p. 22), observes that the Buriats owning allegiance to Russia resemble the Khalkhas within the Chinese border. His remarks indicate an appreciation of the fact that Russian civilization had already in his time begun to take root among them. To the west of the territory occupied by the Buriats, he farther states, lie the Khariat B^ m m !f^ (? Kerait), who are of the same stock with the T'ang-nu Urianghai of the Chinese territory. 534. — Dam ^ jfc. — The Dam Mongols, occupying a portion of tiie frontier between Kokonor and Tibet, known as the region of Tsaidam ^ 9I TfC* ^is semi-savage branch of the 88 PABT XI. — MONGOLIA AND TURKESTAN. Mongol race, occupying in scattered settlements the northern fringe of the territory of Tibet, is probably that which is designated by the Tibetans ** Sok-pa," or the people of the pastures (the Chinese yeo muh). In this word "Sok" it might perhaps be possible to trace a relationship with the muh suh or muk suk '^ ^, the sweet clover or lucerne upon which the horses of Fergana were pastured, according to the reports of the earliest Chinese explorers of Central Asia. Sze-ma Ts'ien, the father of Chinese history, relates that the seeds of this clover were brought back to China by the imperial envoys. ^*^ The outline of the geographical distribution and political grouping of the Mongol tribes, which has been given as concisely as possible above, is intended to serve as an introduction to the list of titles by which their princes, nobility, and other rulers are distinguished. For more minute details, the Institutes of the reigning Dynasty ;^j||'&Htj Books 49 to 52, which have furnished the groundwork of all that precedes, may be consulted. Articles entitled the Topography of Extra-provincial China^ in the Chinese Repository^ Vol. xx, p. 62, and Tlie Army of the Chinese Empire^ ib., p. 336, have also been placed under contribution and are deserving of careful study. The following are the offices and ranks established among the various Mongol tribes : — 535. — MfiNG Chang g ^—Captain-General of a chogolgdn (meng) or league (see ante^ No. 509). This office is bestowed by imperial appointment, on the recommendation of the Mongolian Superintendency. Each league of tribes is placed under the supreme control of such an authority, selected from among the leading chieftains (dzassaks) of all the tribes of the confederation. 536.— Fu MfiNG Chang glj S ;g.— Deputy Captain-General. One to each chogolgdn (as above). 537. — DzAssAK f^, jg| ^, — Chieftain. This title, pronounced in southern Mongolian as Djassaky appears to be a derivative from the Mongol verb dzassakhoy to regulate or govern. With the exception of the tribes or portions of tribes, such as the Ch'ahar and the Pumed^ as noted above, PART XI. — ^UONOOLIA AND TUBKEBTAN. 89 which are placed under the immediate government of Manchu generals, each Mongolian banner is ruled by a chieftain or noble bearing this generic designation. Among the Inner Mongols, the dzassak are classed in six ranks, commencing with that of TsHn Wang IR I, or prince of the first order, and identical in nomen- clature with the six highest ranks of the imperial nobility (see Part I, No. 17). Among the Khalkhas and other tribes of the Outer Mongols, the dzassak of a banner may be of any degree of the six ranks above named, or merely a daidji or noble (see in/rd^ No. 538). The position is in some cases hereditary, in others conferred by imperial appointment, 538.— T^Ai-CHi •& ig.— Noble (Daidji). The daidji are hereditary nobles claiming descent from the founders of the Mongol sovereignty or from the Khans or titular "princes" and "dukes" of the various tribes. They correspond, consequently, in some respects, to the tsung-shih or imperial clansmen of the Chinese (see Part I, No. 29). Among the Oelot tribes, the title isai-sang ^ ^ was employed in the place of daidji for their hereditary nobles. Another term, noyen or noin ]flj ^, with the same meaning, was also heretofore in use among a small number of tribes. Four classes of the rank of daidji are recognized, of which the highest is on a par with the first of the Chinese official ranks, and so on in each class. A daidji of the first class may be the commandant or chief of a banner, in which case he is entitled to prefix the term dzassak (see above) to his tilJe, and he is invested with a seal of office issued by the imperial government. Daidji who are not endowed with official seals are subject to the authority of the dzassaks or chieftains of their respective banners. 539. — T-A-PU-NANG ^ ^^ S* — Noble (Tabunang). This designation is confined to a portion of the T*umed and Kharach'in tribes alone, among which it stands as the equivalent of daidji (see above). 540. — HiEH-Li T*Ar-CHi fft 8 -^ "§• — Administrator. This dignitary acts as assistant to the dzassak in the administration of the affairs of the Banner. Appointments are made to the position from the superior nobles of the Banner. 90 PART XI. — ^MONGOLIA AND TUBKESTAK. 541 .— KwAN K*i Chang King ^ ]R Jt SC-— Adjutant 542-— KwAN K'l Fu Chang King If j|^ gl| JR SC-— Deputy Adjutant The above offices are filled by selection from among the daidji or nobles of each banner. 543.— Ts^an-ling ^ S[.— Colonel. 544.— Tso-LING is, fl|.— Lieutenant-Colonel. These ranks are likewise filled by selection from among the daidji. The tso^-ling has 150 adult males under his command, of whom 50 are reckoned as ma-kia j^ ^ or horse-soldiers, and 100 as kien san SB % ^^ unemployed. 545.— HiAO K^i HiAO ja fif ;K.— Subaltern. 546 — LiNGTS^ui ffl fl|.— Sergeant Six in esich Uo-ling's command. 547.— Orbadu fD R? E g.— The bulk of the Mongol population is thus designated. All families are arranged in groups of ten, under a ahih-chang ff* ^ or decurion. For each group of three ting "J* or men of military age, one soldier's allowance, kia Ep, is issued. The Frontier Commands: The following are the titles of the chief authorities ruling the '^extra-provincial** administrative divisions, under the supreme direction of the Li Fan Yuan or Mongolian Superin tendency (see Part II, No. 1^3). At their head may be placed the ''three Military Lieutenant-Governorships," of which two are associated with the province of Chihli, being subject in civil matters to the control of the Governor-General of that province, and the third (Urumts'i), forming part of the Hi command, is similarly associated with the province of Kansuh. They are as follows : — 548. — i. Jbh-ho Tu-tunq ^ ^ ^ jg{.— Military Lieu- tenant-Governor of Jeh-ho. This large tract of country, embracing tlie easternmost region of the Mongol tribes, is organized in its southern section on the footing of a Chinese administrative division of the first class, under the naioe of Ch^Sng^tSh Fuh ^ D /SP< An PART XI.— MONGOLU AND TURKESTAN, 91 immense tract of country, several hundred miles in length, on its western side, is designated the Wei Chiang ^ j^, or Hunting Reserves, also called Muh-lan ;|C W or muran, which during the earlier reigns of the present dynasty was periodically visited by the Emperor with a large military retinue, for purposes of the . chase and martial exercises (see Part VI, No. 436). Of late years, a population of Chinese squatters has largely encroached upon these reserves. The civil administration of the territory of Jeh-ho, apart from the prefecture of Ch*eng-teh Fu, is conducted under the Military Lieutenant-Governor by secretaries of the Mongolian Superintendency, entitled Li She Sze YUan iS^-^^? or Civil Commissary, and Li Hing Sze Yuan 3il ^ ^ ^^ Judicial Commissary. Sub-Prefects or T^ung P'an (see Part III, No. 283) have of late been appointed for the control of the Chinese squatters in the Hunting Reserves. Secretaries of the Mongolian Superin- tendency are also employed as Collectors of Customs at four points {sze shuei ^) on the Jeh-ho border-line. 549.— li. Ch'aHar Tu-t-ung & ^ W is M —Military Lieutenant-Goveruijr of Ch^ahar (or Chakhar). This officer, residing at Chang-chia K*ow jH ^ D? the gate-town on the line of the Great Wall, commonly known as Kalgan, from the word Kalga^ or gate, in the Mongol tongue, conducts, with the assistance of the Fu Tu t'ung or Deputy Lieutenant-Governor, bis colleague, the government of the Mongol tribes whose territory extends west- ward from the Great Wall to the desert of (if^bi and northward to the land of the Khalkhas (see sup^d, No. 526). The nomade herdsmen of the Ch'ahar and other tribes in this region are entirely subject to the rule of the Tu^tung; but in civil matters relating to Chinese affairs within the Lieutenant-Governorship, as has been observed above, the Governor-General of Chihli exercises a superior jurisdiction. The Prefecture of Siian-hwa Fu, lying between the Inner and the Outer Wall, is nominally part of the Ch^ahar command, but in practice it is administered on the ordinary Chinese territorial system, under the supervision of an Intendant bearing the title of K'ow Peh Tao P ^t IS? residing at Siian-hwa Fu. Three Civil Commissaries, Li She T'unt/ Cite ^see 92 PART XI.— MONGOLIA AND TURKESTAN. Part III, No. 282), stationed respectively at Chang-chia K'ow, Tuh-shih K'ow, and To-lo-no*rli ( Dolon-nor) on the Mongolian plateau, are jointly subject to this functionary and the Military Lieutenant-Governor. 550.— A-Lfe-T^Ai KtJN Ta*i W lf& S •&.— The Military Postroad. The Military Lieutenant-Governor of Ch^ahar is ex-'officio Controller of the postroads, for the conveyance of govern- ment despatches and the transit of officials, which extend from the Great Wall to the Altai {^M ^ ^^HM ^) Mountains, to K^urun, Uliasut'ai, etc. These roads, divided into chan f^ or stages, are served by detachments of Mongol tribesmen who take turns of duty at the kun t'ai jj^ '^ or military posts established at each stage. To these posts, officials throughout the Chinese government service are liable to be banished as the penalty of misconduct, but the service they are nominally required to render in expiation of the offence committed is in most if not in all cases commuted for a money payment, designated as t'ai fei -^ ^, the amount of which is fixed by law. The Mongol tribes along the line of route are required, in addition to detjjchments of guards, to furnish the necessary quota of animals for the post service to and fro. Officials proceeding on duty beyond the Wall receive posting-orders, entitled K'an hoh ^ '^ or tally-slips, from the Board of War, under whose general superintendence the courier service is placed. 551.— iii. Urumts'i Tu-t^ung ,^ # TfC § S5 i^ —Military Lieutenant-Governor of Uruints'i or Unimch'i (Oroumchi). Subject to the control of the Military Governor of the Hi ngion (see infrd^ No. 557). 552.-Uhasut'ai Tsiang Kun ,^ ^ « if^ ^ Jflf !? - Military Governor of Uliasut'ai. This region, the seat of govern- ment of which is the town of Uliasut'ai in the territory of the Sain Noin Khalkhas, is the principal centre of the imperial authority as exercised over the KInilkha trihes. The Military Governor is invested with the special title of ling rim Tso Fu Imuig Kiln ^ JS 4 g'J Hf '^i which may be translated Vice- Wat*den of the Marches, In ad^lition to the subordinate function- PART XI. — ^MONaOLIA AND TURKESTAN. 93 aries placed under bis command (see below), four Deputy Military Governors, entitled Fu Tsiang Kiln g|J Jj^ IjL^ in the persons of a prince of each of the four tribes of the Khalkhas, assist the chief authority in the affairs of his government. Each of the four Mongol dignitaries takes a turn of residence, for three months at a time, at Uliasut'ai. 553.— Uliasut'ai Ts'an-tsan Ta Ch'Sn ,^ M IS S "a ^ H ^ £. — Military Assistant Governor. The Military Governor of Uliasut*ai is assisted by two subordinate functionaries under the above-named title, one of whom is appointed from among the Manchu dignitaries at Peking, and the other from the Khalkha nobles. 554.— Ting Pien Ts^an-tsan Ta Ch^en £ jI # g :fc &— Assistant to the Warden of the Marches (see mprdj No. 552). 555.— K*OBDO Ts^AN-TSAN Ta Ch^Sn Sff ^ $ ^ g a &— Military Assistant Governor, commanding at K^obdo. The Urianghai tribes of the Mongols are placed under the above jurisdictions, subject to the authority of the Military Governor of Uliasut'ai. 556.— K'u-LUN Pan She Ta Ch^en SH JH Wt ^ ^ &— Imperial Agent at K*urun (Urga). Associated with this high officer, usually a Manchu lieutenant-general from one of the Peking banners, is a Mongolian Pan She Ta Ch^en with co-ordinate authority in matters relating to the Mongolian tribes. The Imperial Agent at Urga is specially charged with the control of the frontier town of Kiakhta 'lip ]^ Bl, and the trade conducted there with the Russians. The Manchu term ainban, equivalent to the Chinese designation Ta Ch^en or High Officer, forming part of the title borne by the Imperial Agent and other functionaries of similar position, is frequently applied by European writers to the Chinese representatives in Mongolia and Turkestan. 557.— Ili Tsiang KiJN ^ ^ }» ®.— The Military Governor of Ili. This title, to which a regard for analogy requires the above rendering to be given (see Part V, No. 367), would be more correctly translated by the term Governor-General, 94 PART XT. — ^MOKGOLIA AND TURKESTAN. or Viceroy, of Chinese Turkestan. The region of Hi is, properly- speaking, the territory formerly occupied by the Sungar nation (see suprdy No. 518), the final conquest of which dates from 1759, when the arms of K*ien Lung completed the destruction of the Kahnuk sovereignty and established his supremacy on either side of the Tien Shan mountains. The territories of Sungaria, on the north, and of the Mahommedan cities (or Kashgaria) on the south, of this great range were divided into two vast provinces, entitled respectively, with reference to their position north and south of the mountains, the T'ie7i Shan Peh iw 5c ill 4t K ^^^ T*ien Shan Nan ^w 3^ [II ^ K, and designated generically as Sin Kiang ^ S ^^ ^^® ^®^ Dominion, the supreme control of which was placed in the hands of a Military Governor. The first appointment to this post was made in 1764. Large bodies of Manchus were transferred to the Hi region as military colonists ; and a fortified town adjoining the site of Kuldja on the river Hi was built for the residenco of the Military Governor and his troops. The name of Hwei-yiian Ch'eng S^ ^ JS was given to this place. Five divisions — tui |§5 — of military colonists were established in the Hi region, drawn from the following sources, viz., Manchus from the capital, Solon ^ j^ Manchus from the region of the Amur, Sibe ^ fj^ Mongols from the Jeh-ho region, Chahars, and Oelots (see supra, No. 518), each under the com- mand of a divisional General or Commandant (see infrd, No. 559). Toward the close of the reign of K'ien Lung, a large influx of population into the region of Sungaria was secured by encouraging the migration of Chinese from the provinces of Kansuh and Shensi, to whom extensive tracts of land were allotted. The majority of these settlers were of the Mussulman religion, which had taken root in Western China at a very early date, owing to the influx of Persian and Arab immigrants; and they eventually formed in the Hi region a distinct nucleus of population, known to the Chinese simply as Hwei Min J5 or Mussulman subjects of the State, but designated by their neighbours of the Turki race by the name of Dungan or Tungani, a term the origin of which has not been ascertained. In the neighbourhood of Hi itself PART XI. — MONGOLIA AND TURKESTAN. 95 there further dwells a population of Mahomraedans, known as Taranchi, the descendants of colonists transplanted from Kashgaria. This part of the population still retains its Turki language and other marks of alien extraction. The name Taranchi is said to be derived from tararij millet, and hence to signify a millet-grower or farmer. The Dungan or Chinese Mussulman immigrants, on the other hand, found their way not only into Sungaria but also into the region south of the TMen Shan, where they mixed but did not harmonize with the indigenous population. Although pro- fessing the same religion with the Chinese Mussulmans, the Mahommedans of Kashgaria were descended from a different stock, that of the Turki or Uigur race. From this medley of nationalities have grown the conflicts of the last fifteen years, in the course of which the Chinese occupation of both Sungaria and Kashgaria became extinguished, Hi falling to the share of Russia, and Kashgaria being erected into a Mussulman Kingdom by the prowess of Yakub Khan, an adventurer from Kokand. He, with his adherents, became known to the Chinese by the name of ** the Andijani," — Ngan-tsi-yen ^ $^ J|E, — from Andijan, the city of Kokand with which the most frequent relations have customarily been maintained from the side of Kashgar. Notwithstanding the expulsion of Chinese authority from the territories on either side of the T^ien Shan, ideas of reconquest have never been abandoned, and a partially successful attempt in that direction has occupied the imperial forces for several years past. The following are the ranks of the military administration subject to the control of the Tsiang KUn of Hi : — 558.— Ts^AN TSAN Ta Ch^^n j^St ^ E.— Military Assistant Governor. One at Hi, one at Tarbagatai, one at Yarkand. 559.— Ling Tui Ta Ch^Sn f^^:fi g.— Commandant of the Forces, — at Hi, Tarbagatai, Ush, Yarkand, Urumts'i, Turfan, Guchen, and Kurkara Usu (see supra, No. 557). 560.— Pan She Ta Ch'Sn if^^g.— Agent,— at Kashgar, Kharashar, Kuche, Aksu, Khoten and Hami. (See also Xo. 556). 561.— HiBH Pan Ta Ch^Sn 18 |J? :fc g and Pang Pan 96 PART XI. — MONGOLIA AND TURKESTAN. Ta CH'feN H^ ^ E.— Assistant Agent. At Ush and Hami. 562.— TsuKG Li Ts^ing Hai She Wuh Ta CH^flN ig| g ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ g. — Imperial Controller-General of Kokonor. Invested with the control of the Mongol and Tangutian (fan §) tribes of the Ts*ing Hai or Kokonor region. (See supra. No. 524). 563. — PfiH-K^fiH fg jg. — Beg. This title, universally in use among the followers of Islam, is employed among the Chinese Mahommedans of Turkestan and the region of Hami as a generic designation for the local chieftains. The begs under Chinese authority are classed in five degrees of rank, ranging from the third to the seventh degree of the Chinese official scale. The Ma- hommedans of the Hami and Turfan region, who are of Mongol descent, are distinguished by a organization similar to that of the Mongol tribes. Their chiefs are invested with the designation dzassak (see supra, No. 537), in addition to which the titles of Wang, beilSh, etc., are conferred upon them as is the rule among the Mongols proper. The Mahommedans of other than Chinese or Mongol descent are commonly known as ch'aji t^ow Hwei-hwei ^ BM ISly or " turban -wearing Mussulmans." The following are the most important among the titles and attributes of the Begs of different classes in Kashgaria : i. Ak'im Beg pj ^ tJC (6 jS* — Local Governor. ii. IsHKHAN Beg 19^ ff- ^ ffi j£. — Assistant Governor. iii. Shang Beg |g| {^ [^.—Collector of Revenue. iv. Katsanatch'i Beg |!§ ^ IA 9 f6 !S- — Same as above. v. 'Hatsze Beg ^ ^ i^ ^. — Judge. vi. MiRABU Beg i^ Ij|J ^P ffi jg.— Superintendent of Agricul- ture. (See @ S oE ^ Description of Turkestan, B. VII). PART Xn. — TIBET AND THE LAMAIST HIERARCHY. 97 PART XII.-TIBET AND THE LAMAIST HIERARCHY. 564. — Tibet, or Thibet, which the progress of events during the last two centuries has converted into a dependency of the Chinese Empire, is known to the Chinese of the present day by the name of Tsang ^ or Si Tsang H ||{. This appellation has superseded the term U-sze Kwoh ,^ ^ S or U-sze Tsang by which the country was known under the Ming dynasty, from the indigenous designation Us Tsang, or U Tsang, signifying Central and Pure, at that time applied to it. The native sound of U appears farther to have been corrupted by the Chinese into Wei, whence the designation Wei Tsang ^ ^ has come to be used as the general geographical title for the entire country. The limits at present assigned to the territory of Tibet occupy only a part of tlie ancient region of T^u Fan ^ ||, the people of which, known hIso by the name of Si Fan "g ^ and T^ang-ku-teh ^ •jjf i^ i^^ M "6" W) ^'^*y Tangiit, were for many centuries the dreaded enemies of the Chinese. Tlie name Tibet, by which, since the day of Marco Polo, the country has been known in European geogiaphy, is represented in Chinese by the characters T^u-pSh-- teh H fl3 4$ (T'ubod), intended probably to reproduce the sound of the appellation given to it among the Mongols. The Tibetans call themselves Bod, and their country Bod-jul, — the land of Bod, a term the derivation of which has been variously interpreted by European writers, but which the Chinese appear to identify with Full Kiooh ^ g — the land of Buddha. According to the legends preserved by indigenous records, the first germs of enlightenment and order were introduced into Tibet bv offslioots of the race of 8akya, from which the founder of the Buddhist religion had himself earlier derived his descent; and Srongtsan Qampo ^ ^ M ^ ^h whose lineage is traced through seven generations to the first of the semi-mythi^-al sovereigns of this line, became in the seventh century of our era at once the first acknowledged ruler of the entire land of Tibet, and also the introducer and 98 PART XII. — TIBBT AND THE LAMAIST HIBRAROHY. vigorous patron of the Buddhist religion among his subjects. He took to wife, on the one hand, a daughter of the sovereign of Nipal — Pai'pu j^ ^ or Pa-pu-Uh Kwoh G ^ ]|Hl H» *-^> ^^^ Parbuttiya Kingdom — and, on the other, the princess Win Ch^6ng 3lt JA & £9 daughter of the emperor T*ai Tsung of the T'ang dynasty in China. This last-named alliance was contracted in A.D. 641. For many centuries his descendants, with the title of Gialbo — in Chinese, l^san-p^u JR ^ — continued to rule over Tibet, although in the course of time the temporal authority became encroached upon to a large extent by the pretensions of the Buddhist hierarchy which had gradually come into being. In the course of the eleventh century, in particular, the superiors of a religious association known as the Sakya — in Chinese Hi ^ — monastery, originally founded under the patronage of a royal prince, began to usurp the exercise of exclusive powers of government; and for some centuries later, this priesthood appears to have wielded a predominant influence in the affairs of Tibet. Known at that period as at present by the name of Brugpa — in Chinese written ^ ^ "^ Ci — the Sakya priesthood is also distinguished by the title of the Red Church — Hung Kiao ig[ fjj; — from the colour of the vestments and headcovering they adopted. The primitive doctrines of Buddhism, already largely corrupted in Tibet, from the earliest period of its introduction, by Hindoo and especially Bivaitic forms of worship, were farther perverted among the Sakya priesthood by a deliberate departure from the rule of celibacy. Marriage was permitted among them with the avowed object of securing an hereditary transmission of power ; and magic arts in infinite variety and with unbounded pretensions to efficacy were professed among them as a means of ensuring their supremacy in the popular mind. A revolt against the corrupt and licentious rule of the Sakya priesthood took place at length in the fifteenth century of our era under the leadership of a reformer named Tsongkhaba — in Chinese ^ l§ Ci —born at Si Ning in A.D. 1417. The history of this earnest innovator's career may be read elsewhere;* for tlie purposes of the present * See Die LamaUche Hierarehie und Kirche, by C. F. KoBPPKN, Berlin, 1859, p. 109 et seq. PART Xn» — TIBET AND THE LAMAIST HIERARCHY. 99 sketch it suffices to observe that he preached with success in various parts of Tibet the necessity of a return to the primitive doctrines and observances of the religion of Shakyamuni, as an outward and .visible sign of which he insisted on the adoption of the yellow robe and hat (yellow, or the colour of gold, being assigned in early legends to the founder of Buddhism) in lieu of the vestments of red which distinguished the ruling hierarchy. The preachings of Tsongkhaba were attended with remarkable success, and before his death, which^ according to Chinese accounts, took place in A.D. 1478, he found himself widely acclaimed as the spiritual leader of the Lamaist majority. His reforms were welcomed and supported by the emperors of the Ming dynasty, who saw in them a means of extending their influence over the ' Tibetan people, more especially as the now discredited Sakya or Bed hierarchy had been staunch and favoured supporters of the descendants of Kublai, lately supplanted on the throne of China. The reformer left behind him two eminent disciples, upon whom, in the words of a Chinese chronicler, he "laid commands, enjoining upon them that they should be born again, generation after generation, as ^huMl'Jian 1^ H ]^ ^, to practise the doctrines of the Great Conveyance ( Ta C/i^ing, Sanskr. MaJidydnay the esoteric form of Buddhism). The word ^hubiNian signifies in Chinese hwa shin ft ^ (i.e., transformed body, transformation, reembodi- ment). The two disciples were called respectively Dalai Lama and Fanshen Lama." From the period referred to above, the spiritual and a large portion of the temporal authority in Tibet, which had previously been engrossed by the Red hierarchy, was wielded by the succes- sive "reembodiments" of Tsongkhaba's disciples, whose identity, on their reappearance in human form, has been merged, according to the legends that have subsequently arisen, in the personality of the two most exalted and revered of the divinities proceeding from the essence of the Buddha himself. In the senior of the two, the Dalai Lama, the Bddhisattwa AvalokitSswara (the Chinese Kwan Yin), is believed to appear on earth; and in the persoii of the second the Bddhisattwa Manchusri is recognized. 100 BART XII. — TIBET AND THE LAMAIST HIBRAROHY. tiiiis deity having preliminarily occupied the form, it is also fabled, of Tsongkbabd himself. The second in succession of the Dalai Lanj^as, in the course of a long career, laid the foundation of the existing hierarchical system in Tibet, establishing his seat of ecclesiastical rale at Lassa, and organizing a body of lesser spiritual dignitaries, under the designation ^hut^ukht'u (see iw/ra, No. 589), who, like the two supreme religious chiefs, were to be continued by a series of reembodiments. Like the Dalai and the Panshen lamaa, these spiritual chiefs of the Tibetan priesthood became popularly known as "living Buddhas," — in Chinese hwoh Fuh JS^ •—a term by which they are at present commonly designated. In the course of the latter half of the 17th century, the authority of the Dalai Lama having gained entire predominance throughout the greater portion of Tibet, the gialbos or descendants of the ancient kings appear to have gradually faded into insigni- ficance, whilst at the same time, under various pretexts, inter- ference in Tibetan affairs on the part of a succession of ambitious Mongol princes grew more and more direct. Already, at a some- what earlier period, Gushi Khan, in Chinese designated as @i&ff , the reigning prince of the Khoshot Mongols, had supported the Dalai Lama of the period against the claims of the temporal sovereign, and had been rewarded for his fidelity to the hierar- chical cause with the title of Nomen *Han |§ ff) ff ? or Prince (Khan) of the Religious Law, an equivalent to the Sanskrit Dh&rma Raja. By the influence of Gushi Khan, the Dalai and Panshen Lamas were induced to despatch an embassy, in A.D. 1642, with professions of respect and tenders of allegiance to the court of the Manchu sovereign, whose forces were then on the eve of effecting the overthrow of the Ming dynasty in China ; and from this period relations of intimacy took their rise, developing themselves in time into the assumption, on the part of t&e Chinese emperors, of the sovereign tutelage of the Buddhist papacy in Tibet, This consummation was hastened by the wars undertaken toward the close of the 17th and in the early part of the 18th century by the Sungar chieftains (see Part XI, No. 518) for the subversion of the authority of the Dalai Lama. The temporal PABT Xn. — TIBBT AND THB LAJCAIST HIERABOHT. 101 administrator who^ as a regent under the Dalai Lama, had long conducted the government of Tibet, with the title of Diba, in Chinese ^ £ ^^ Jg| £ {i.e., ruler, or chief) was invested by K^ang Hi in A.D. 1694 with the title of T^u-pik-t'Sh Kwoh Wang^ or King of Tibet; but the authority thus established was ere long attacked by an invasion of the Sungars, and the Chinese armies which were despatched hereupon for the liberation of Tibet remained as conquerors of the country. After an interval during which the Government remained in the hands of puppet nominees of the Chinese sovereign, an outbreak directed against one of these gave the pretext for the appointment of two High Commis- sioners to control the affairs of Tibet on behalf of the Chinese government. This took place in A.D. 1725. Farther attempts at revolt led, in A.D. 1750, to the entire suppression of the temporal sovereignty in Tibet, and the government of the country was placed, thenceforward, in the hands of the Dalai and Panshen Lamas, aided by a council of four laymen, entitled Kalon or Kablon, i.e.. Ministers of State, under the direction in chief of the two Imperial Commissioners or Residents appointed from Peking. The government has from that time forward continued to be conducted upon this basis, the authority of the Chinese administration being rendered the more complete by the long minorities which are entailed at each successive "reembodiment" of the two supreme ecclesiastical dignitaries. The territorial divisions, or provinces, — pu Q5 — *t present established, are four in number, and are named as follows : — i. Ts^iEN TsANG Ijf m, or Anterior Tibet. This section of the country, the easternmost, and therefore nearest to the Chinese frontier, is also known as K'ang ]||, written by some geographers as Kham, and also known as Chamdo $ TfC $• ii. Wei ^ or Chung Tsang t^ |B|> — Central Tibet, contkin- ing the seat of government, Lassa Jft m, and the residence of the Dalai Lama, the great Monastery of PotalA ^ JH |3:. iii. How Tsang ^ ^ — Ulterior Tibet, or simply Tsang, containing the seat of government of the Panshen Lama, at Teshilumbo or Chasbilumbu fL # iH ^< 102 PART XII. — TIBBT AND THK LAMAIST HEffiRARCHY. iv. Ngari f^ £. — Western Tibet. The following are the ranks and offices which remain to be considered : — Chinese Administration in Tibet: 565.— Chu Tsang Ta Ch^Iin ft ]j|. :fc g.— Imperial Besident in Tibet. With this high officer a colleague or Assistant Besident is associated, distinguished by the title of Pang Pan Ta Ch^Sn fif m ;K; S- T^oili Besident and Assistant Besident are commonly selected from among the superior officers of the Manchu Banners, and are placed under the direction of the Li Fan Yuan or Mongolian Superintendency (see Part II, No. 183), but with the duty of memorializing the Throne direct on all questions of importance. They likewise correspond on a footing of equality with the Goyemor-General of the adjacent Chinese province of Sze-ch'wan, whence the troops constituting the Chinese garrison and the officers of the Chinese civil administration in Tibet are detailed. The provincial exchequer of Sze-chVan is charged, also, with the expenses of the Chinese occupation and government of Tibet. Among his other duties, the Imperial Besident acts as the medium of relations between the Chinese government and the Court of Nepal, which is Icnown to the Chinese as JS Hf ^ Bl or the Kingdom of the Ghorkhas, the people and products of the country being at the same time designated Pai-pu ^ ^ or Pa-pu Ei ^, i.e.y Parbuttiya. For the conduct of correspondence with the Tibetan and Nepalese authorities he has on his staff a "Secre- tary for Native (lit barbarian) Affairs" — I TsHng Chang-king 55 W 3t *^. Appointments to the principal civil and military offices of the Tibetan government and hierarchy are made on nominations submitted to the Throne by the Imperial Besidents, who are also invested with the supreme command of both the Chinese garrison troops and the Tibetan soldiery or Fan ping ^ ^. The Imperial Institutes provide for a corps of about 1,500 officers and men, detached from the provincial forces of Sze-ch*wan, who are distributed at various points in the Tibetan territory. The Tibetan soldiery, consisting principally of village militia, undrilled and armed only with the most antiquated description of PART XII. — TIBET AND THE LAMAI8T HIERABCHT. 103 weapons, is officially reckoned at a force of 64,000 men, of whom 14,000 are described as cavalry. For the commanders of these forces (see tn/ra, Nos. 579-583). Through the four Ministers or Kahn (see infrdj No. 567) the Imperial Residents control the entire Tibetan administration. 566. — Liang T*ai 10 •^. — Commissary. Of this rank three Chinese officials, belonging to the class of Sub- Prefect or Assistant Magistrate, are stationed at Lassa, Tashilumbo, and Ngari, where they act both as paymaster^ of the Chinese forces and as deputies of the Imperial Residents in all matters concerning Chinese interests in Tibet. They are relieved, according to regulation, at the expiry of two years' service. Secular Administration in Anterior Tibet: 567.— -Kalon (Kablon) Bg ^ ||. — Councillor of State. The secular affairs of Tibet are administered by a Council com- posed of four Ministers under the above title. The majority of the incumbents of this office, who act under the immediate supervision of the Imperial Residents, are laymen, receiving their appointment by decree from Peking on nomination by the Residents, and becoming ea-^fficio invested with the third degree of Chinese official rank. The superior officers of the Tibetan army are eligible for the post of Kalon. The Council Chamber is designated Ka Hia Kg ^. 568. — Shang Shang fj^ J:. — The Treasury. This depart- ment, presided over by the Kalon (see above), has the supreme control of all matters relating to the collection of revenue and secular affairs in general in Tibet. 569. — TsAi-pfiNQ ff }$. — Councillor of the Treasury (first -^ class). Three in number ; invested with the 4th degree of Chinese official rank. 570. — SHA!;rG Chodba |9f Jft !|# fi. — Councillor of the ^ Treasury (second class). Two in number; rank as above. 571. — ^Ykrts'angba fj^Wlt £.— Controller of the Revenue. Two in number; 5th rank. » « ^ > 104 PART XII* — ^TIBBT AND THE LAMAI8T HIERARCHY. 572.^— LangtsaiHia J^ ff (|.— Controller of Streets and Boads. Two in number; 5th rank. 573. — HiERBANG f2 m ^. — Commissioner of Justice. Two in number; 5th rank. 574. — SnlfeDiBA :j^ Hf Q. — Superintendent of Police. Two in number; 5th rank. 575.— Taping % J$.— Controller of the stud. Two in number; 6th rank. C. ^^^^ ' 576. — Chung Yih tfi gg.— Secretary of the Council. Of two ranks, having the characters ta ^ (great) and aiao ij> (lesser) respectively prefixed the title. Invested with the 6th and 7th ranks. 577. — Chonir j^ ^ ^. — Secretary (second class) of the Council. Three in number; 6th rank. 578. — DiBA ^ ^ ov J^ Ei- — (a). Commissioner. This title, signifying in Tibetan one who rules or is chief, was borne during the 17th and 18th centuries by the secular delegate of the Dalai Lama, in whose name he wielded the government of the country, (b). District governor or Headman. Thirteen func- tionaries of this description are recognized in the Imperial Institutes. They are divided into six classes, each with special functions, such as superintendents of revenue, of cattle, etc., etc. Military Ranks: 579. — Taip^ng ^ J$. — Commandant. Six in all. This, the highest military position, is invested with the 4'th degree of Chinese rank. The sound was formerly denoted by the characters tai'pSn f^ ^. 580. — JupfeNG ft 5$. — Commander of 200 men; 5th rank. Twelve in all. 581.— KiAPfeNG ^ J$.— Officer of the 6th rank. Twenty- four in all. 582.— TiNGPfeNG j£ J$.— Officer of the 7th rank. One hundred and twenty in all. 583. — Fan Muh ^ g. — A generic designation for PART Xn* — TIBET AND THB LAMAIST HUERAROHY. 105 Tibetan officers of all ranks, both civil and military. Appoint- ments of officers to the subordinate military ranks are made, according to regulation, by selection from among the scions of the ancient native nobility or aristocracy jjj: ^, known by the name of Tongkhor « JplW (See * « # JH^f «, Book 741). The Lamaist Hierarchy: 584. — Lama m ^, — This designation, applied to all members of the priesthood observing the forms of Tibetan Buddhism, is derived from a Tibetan word which, according to the Chinese, has the meaning of m?m ^hang ^ J;, ».«., "unsurpassed" or "without a superior." 585.— Dalai Lama ^ JB 1*1 IW-— One of the joint Pontiifs of Tibet (see below). The word dalai or ^a^^in Mongolian signifies ** Ocean," and corresponds to the Tibetan word Djamta^o or Chatnts^Oj which, in the combination Cheptsun Djarnts'o Rinpoc.h^4^ or Venerable Ocean Treasure, constitutes the proper title of this dignitary. As already remarked above (see supra, No. 564), the Dalai Lama is regarded as the reembodiment which is assumed by the spirit of one of Tsongkhaba's two disciples, and at the same time as an incarnation or Avatar of the Bodhisattwa Avalokiteswara. Having engrossed in their own hands, as already narrated, the temporal power in Tibet, successive Dalai Lamas of the last century were recognized by the emperors of China as the supreme pontiffs of the Yellow Church 'Sfi ^ ^ 'Mf fRy ^i^d the utmost veneration has been manifested toward their successors up to the present moment. Their residence is fixed at Mount Fotala $ m ^ (one of the three sacred mountains of this name, the original being situated, according to Buddhist legends, in Lidia, and the third, known in Chinese by the name of P'u-t^o Shan ^ PiS ill ) forming the well-known island of monasteries on the coast of Chehkiang), near Lassa ^ m, the chief city of Anterior Tibet At this place, the ancient capital of the kingdom, are situated the la Chao ^ ^'and Siao Cliao *J^ J^j ^^ Greater and Lesser Temples {chao in Tibetan signifying monastery or shrine), w^bich date £rom the period of the Chinese alliance io 106 PABT XII. — TIBET AND THS LAMAI8T HIBRABCHT. the seventh century. The Ta Chaoy in particular, is celebrated as containing a famous effigy of the princess of the house of T^ang, now worshipped, together with her consort from Nepal, among the chief divinities of the Lamaist pantheon. (See suprd^ No. 564). The succession to the office of Dalai Lama occurs, as already mentioned above, by a process of "reembodiment." For some centuries, and until within comparatively recent times, the rela- tives or surrounding of each successive pontiff contrived, by more or less open acts of fraud, to indicate after his decease the individual whom it suited them to select as the new Avatar. In order to obviate proceedings of this kind, which had more than once brought forward persons distasteftil and dangerous to the suzerain power, the emperor K^en Lung ordained, in A.D. 1792, that for the future both the succession to this august office and also the appointment to other spiritual dignities of a similar nature (see infrd^ No. 589) should be determined by the drawing of lots. At the decease of each Dalai Lama, accordingly, — when, like all members of the class endowed with the privilege of successive births, he is said to have ^' entered upon the perfection of repose," yUan tsih [Q ^, enquiries are made by the priesthood with reference to miraculous signs, ling i f| f|, which may have been observed in attendance upon the birth of children at about the same period. Particulars of the required kind are always duly procured; and these are transmitted in proper form to the Imperial Besidents at Lassa. After scrutiny of the documents and report being made to Peking, a certain number of the children are brought with their parents to Lassa. Here, on an appointed day, their names are inscribed on slips of wood, wUch, after being carefully sealed, are deposited in the "golden urn," kin pSn^ pa pHng ^ >4C £ JK? prescribed by the regulation instituted by K'ien Lung. The name drawn forth from the urn is hailed amid universal rejoicing as that of the new incarnation, and the Dalai Lama is declared to have " come forth in reembodiment " — eh^u ^hubil^han ^H^SLMWy ^^^^ ^ Mongol word signifying " bodily transformation" or metamorphosis (in Chinese, hwa shin ffj Jj^). After a short period of instruction, the newly acclaimed pontiff. PART Xn. — TIBET AND THE LAMAIST HIERARCHY. 107 at the age of perhaps two or three)yeavs, is solemnly enthroned — t8o chwang ^ ^ — and during his long ensuing minority he remains, as a matter of course, a puppet in the hands of the Chinese Imperial Residents.* 586.— Panshen Erdeni Lama mWUWBJB^B'— One of the joint Pontiffs of Tibet (see above). Joint heir with the Dalai Lama of the spiritual inheritance derived from Tsong- khaba, the Panshen Erdeni is believed bv the Tibetans to be worthy of the higher degree of adoration, his office and functions being less contaminated by worldly cares and influences. To him is confided the maintenance of the purity of religious doctrine, as to the Dalai Lama is attributed the temporal governance of the Tibetan realm. His title signifies "The Precious Teacher" (Panshen or Banshen==the Indian Pandita, and Erdeni in Mon- golian -being the equivalent of the Tibetan word Rin-pO'Clie\ signifying Treasure). His residence is at Tashilumbo JLfH&^j or the Mountain of Blessings, a city lying at a distance of 700 li or about eight days' journey to the westward of Lassa. Here the Panshen Lama presides over an administration entirely composed of ecclesiastics, sharing with the Dalai Lama the headship of the Yellow Church, but mixing little, if at all, in questions of secular administration. Succession is contrived, at each ensuing decease, by the same device with is applied in the case of the Dalai Lama {see above). The sixth in succession of the Panshen Lamas, Lobtsang Tanishi by name, was persuaded by the emperor K'ien Lung to undertake the journey to Peking, in order to take part in the festivities on His Majesty's 70th birthday, in A.D. 1780; and it was for this dignitary's special reception that the vast pile of buildings at Jeh-ho, the emperor's summer retreat, was con- structed on the model of those occupied by the Panshen Erdeni at Tashilumbo. An attack of small-p9x carried off the illustrious visitor toward the close of the year ; and whilst his remains were, solemnly escorted back to Tibet, a magnificent mausoleum was * For a detailed account of the selection and enthronement of the Dalai Lama reference may be made to a paper by the author, entitled " Illuatrationu of the Lamaist System in Tibet," in the Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain and Ireland^ Vol. IV, Part I, 1869. 108 F4JtT XU.— TlfiBT AKD THS LAMAIST H;p}BAB€i9T. erected within the precincts of the temple he had inhabited during his stay at Peking, in which the robes of the deceased Ponti^ are enshrined. 587.~Noh£n <Han ^ ^ Sg.— Begent, or Dh&rma B&ja. This is a title which, with sundry distinctive epithets, has long been customarily bestowed upon eminent supporters of the Lamaist hierarchy. The expression is rendered in Chinese by the charac- ters Fall Wang ft I, or " Prince of the [Religious] Law, or True F^ith" equivalent to the Sanskrit J)harmQ> RdjOf; apd the &r$jb r^o^d instance of its bestowal was in the case of Gushi Ehan, the celebrated IQioshoit spvereigij^, who pUced, in A.]). 1643, the Dalai Lama in possession of the temporal sovereignty of Tibet (see auprdy No. 564). The Imperial Listitutes record numerous instances in which this title was conferred, in the course of the 18th century, upon a succession of ecclesiatical dignitaries^ under whose d|ir^tio]|;i the Tibetan Council appears to have been placed during the repeated minorities of the Dalai. It became customary, $4so, to bestow a ming h^o £ it or title of honour, su^h as th^^t of iGf^dan ^t^'m H H AftfiSH) ^^^^ with theoiBeeof BiJdb^ B 32 # ( ^P Mojsigoli^n, Te^ujher or Pr^ceptqr, the Chinese Slie {j|), or Samadi Bakhshi (apparently from the Sankrit Sam&dhi, absorbed in contemplation), upon the Begent thus appointed. The power which was consequ^itly wielded by successive dignitaries of this class led to their receiving in populs^* parlance the title of Trnng Wang H £ King (or feudatory Prince) of Tibet The appointment of functionaries of such dievated rank as this at length terminated in 1844, when the Begent, shortly after the visit to Lassa which has been graphically described by the Abbe Hue, was accused of treasonable designs and lawless conduct in many respects, and, having been made a prisoner, degraded, and unfrocked by an Imperial Decree, was banished to the Amur. Allowed to return to his native place, on the borders of Kansuh, he died in 1854; and an application lately made for the recognition of his ^^ reembodiment,^' said to have appeared on the spot in the person of a lad now aged 17, has been negatived in pursuance of the Decree of 1844, by which he PAltT Xn. — TL^m AND THS LAHAISt HIEKAItCllT. 109 was "forbidden foreyer the privitege of appearing again on ehx&i in human form." (Bee Peking GcuttUB of July 25th, August 29th, and September 7th, 1877).— See also inftd, No. 595. 588. — K^AN-pa j§ ^^. — Abbot. The title bestowed upon the chief ecclesiastic of all Lamaist monasteries. By a decree of A.D. 1792, it was ordained that in the case of all K^an^fu enthroned {tso ch^wang |S K:) in the larger class of lUonast^Tit^, appointments should be made by the joint authority of the Dalai Lama and the Imperial Residents ; the smaller class alone were to be left to the appointment of the Dalai Lama himself. An envoy, with presents by way of tribute from the Dalai and Pansheh Lamas, who is sent annually to Peking, is selected from among the k^an-pu of the Tibetan monasteries. He is designated in Chinese by the title ErchHn ^ ^ \j^ — a representation of the Manchu word signifying envoy. 589.— ^HuT^UKHT'u If B jg H-— Saint. This class of dignitaries, to which the Dalai and Panshen Lamas themselves belong, may be said to constitute the mo&t marked and essential feature of the Tibetan form of Buddhism. Derived from a Mongolian word which is interpreted in Chinese as signifying Uai lujen J^ ^ Ay ^•^•9 one who returns again, an Avatar-^the ^hut^ukht^u supply, in their successive reembodiments, thstt trans- mission of authority in safe or chosen hands which the enforcement of a strict rule of celibacy might otherwise render impracti- cable. Confined, at the outset, to the territory of Tibet proper, the appearance of ^hut^ukld^u rulers has gradually overspread, with the Lamaist form of worship, the whole of Mongolia. According to traditional theory, the spirit of each 'hd^ukht^u reappears, on his decease, in the person of some newly born infant, and thus "comes forth reembodied" — eh^u^huhU^Iian — as has already been described above (see suprdy No. 585). The number of ^hut^ukht^u recognized in the Imperial Institutes, and registered by the Mongolian Superintendency, is 160 in all. These are distributed as follows : In Tibet, 30, including 12 who are known by the distinctive appellation of ahaburung tp ^ ^; in Northern Mongolia, 19 ; in Southern Mongolia, 57 ^ in the Kokonor region .* 1 110 PART XII. — TIBET AND THE LAMAIST HIERARCHY. of Tibet, 35 ; and in Chamdo, on the Sze-ch'wan border, 5. At and near Peking there are, finally, 14 representatives of the class. The special token by which they are identified, at the time of their reembodiment, is the faculty of recalling events or of recog- nizing objects connected with the history of their preceding existences. With one exception — that of the Ch'akhan Nomen *Han (see infrd^ No. 595), the system of drawing lots from the golden urn, Icin p^ing ^ ^, according to the politic rule introduced by K4en Lung (see supra, No. 585) is enforced in the case of each succession. The ^hut^ukht^u are familiarly known as hicok Full ^ ^, or living Buddhas. 590. — Shabinor ^ ^t 5ffi W- — The designation applied to members of the Lamaist fraternity, undistinguished by any special rank. Ecclesiastics of the Government of Ulterior Tibet: 591. — Chi-chunq Lama ^ fiji jlH ^* — Chief Councillor. 592. — Sui-pSng Lama ;|| f $ (jj^ ^* — Lama of the second deofree. 593. — Sit:!^-PEN Lama ^ 7|C 5H p|$. — Lama of the third / degree. 594.— Chonir Lama 41 >B W !!U Bft.— Lama of the fourth degree. ^*^ The above ranks are filled by the appointment on the part of the Imperial Eesident, on nomination proceeding from the Panshen Erdeni Lama. The functions discharged by the respec- tive individuals are not specified in the Imperial Institutes (cf. :^ iS t * * W, B. 742, p. 18). 595.— Ch'aman Nomen ^Han |g 9I If fjg ^.— The title enjoyed by the hereditary chieftain of one of the banners of the T^umeds, claiming descent from Manchusri ^Hut^ukht^u, a spiritual counsellor sent by the Dalai Lama about A.D. 1580 to assist his warlike patron, Altan Khakan (Khan), the celebrated chieftain of the Ordos tribes. This dignitary and his reembodi- ments were long established at Koku ^Hotu, the modern Sui-yiian 1"^' UJU. ''^-^A. PART XII. — TIBET AND THE LAMAIST HIERARCHY. Ill Ch^eng, where they enjoyed, with reference to the colour appro- priate to the Bodhisattwa Manchusri, the above title, signifying White Prince of the [Religious] Law, rendered in Chinese as Pell Full 1^ "1% or White Buddha. The policy of the early sovereigns of the present dynasty led to the displacement of this spiritual potentate, who was compelled to remove with his tribe to the region south of the Yellow River, and to pass under the control of the Imperial Commissioner of Kokonor. Attempts on the part of the Ch'akhan Nomen Han of the period to recross the Yellow River in 1820-1821 rendered military operations against him necessary, and since that period the tribe has con- tinued submissive, its ruler wielding great influence at the same time over all the Mongol and Tibetan population of this wild region. A decree of A.D. 1794 makes an exception in favour of the Ch^akhan Nomen ^Han with regard to the principle of reem- bodiment, which is allowed, in his case only, to be restricted to members of the same family, on the alleged ground of his being a dzassak, ue., wielding temporal as well as spiritual authority. 596. — Cheptsundampa 'Hut'ukht'u ® ^ § iJJ- £ P? H "^ g. — The title assigned to the Metropolitan or Patriarch of the Khalkha tribes, ranking third (z.^., next to the two joint Pontiffs of Tibet) in degree of veneration among the dignitaries of the Lamaist church. The title takes its rise from the 'hut'uklit^u commissioned in A.D. 1604 to take up his abode among the Mongols of the North-west, where his authority was transmitted by reembodiment in the person of a younger brother of the Khan of the T^ushet^u tribe. In A.D. 1688, at a time when the Khalkhas felt no longer able to contend successfully against their adversaries the Sungars (see supra, No. 564), it was proposed in council to seek refuge under the Russian sovereignty. The 'Hut^ukht'u, on being appealed to as umpire, decided against this proposal, in view of the fact that protection of the Yellow Church was not to be looked for in that quarter ; and the Khalkhas upon this tendered their allegiance to the emperor K'ang Hi, by whom territories were assigned to them and rank and titles were bestowed upon their chiefs. (Sung Yiin, vol. i, p. 19). Since this period 112 PART XIL — TIBET AND THB LAMAKT HIBRARCHT. the successors of the Cheptsundampa ^Hut^nkht^u have been treated with high respect by the Chinese Court, although measures were taken, during the reign of K4en Lung, to forbid the con- tinuance of the succession as an appanage of the family of the T^ushet^u Khan. The residence of the ^Hut'ukht^u, whose authority is recognized as supreme by the T^ushet^u and Tsetsen Khanates^ is fixed at K^urun j$ jjf (Urga), where he acts as the spiritual colleague of the Chinese Imperial Agent {see Part XI, No. 556). The title he bears is derived from the Tibetan words Cliepimn^ ^Wenerable," and Dampay " sacred." To this the Sanskrit appel- lation Tdranatha^ signifying "resplendent divinity" is added, whence the title of Taranatha Lama is derived as a common substitute for the official designation. By the Mongols, the patriarch is also frequently referred to as Maidari ^Hut^ukht^u (from Maitreya, the Messiah of Buddhism). He is likewise described as Gheghen (f.«., the Great) 'Hut^ukht'u. 597. — Chu King Lama ft ^ !(IJ IHt. — The Lamaist Or- ganization in and near Peking. In iui^therance of their policy of ensuring the control of the Mongolian tribes by means of ecclesiastical influences, the Chinese sovereigns of the reigning dynasty have been profuse in the establishment of Lamaist places of worship and official dignities in Peking and throughout the adjacent region. The emperors of the Ming dynasty had indeed set an example in this respect, intrgducing the indecent Sivaitic effigies worshipped in Tibet, which are know to the Chinese as Hwan-hi Fuh iDt S ft ( i.^., Buddhas of Delight), into the palace itself; but the patronage extended to the Yellow Church by K'ang Hi and his descendants is conceived upon a far more extensive scale. Vast Lamaist communities have been founded at Jeh-ho and Dolon Nor in Inner Mongolia, and at Wu T'ai Shan in the province of Shansi, where a famous temple dedicated to the Bddhisattwa Manehusri \ attracts annually crowds of pilgrims from all parts of Mongolia, as well as in the imperial capital itself. At the imperial Mausolea, likewise, lamaseries are established, at which services are con- tinually performed in honour of the deceased sovereigns. The P4lBT Xn. — TIB£T AND TH^i LAMAIST HISJUBCHT. 113 following are the principal dignitaries and other members of this branch of the Lamaist hierarchy : — 596. — Chang-CHI A ^Hut^ukht^u j|t jK ^^ H j£ I- — The Metropolitan. This dignitary is the acknowledged reembodi- meat of a ^Imt^ukkt'u despatched, under the same title, to represent him near the Chinese Court toward the close of the 17th century by the Dalai Lama of that period. Heceived with profound respect by the emperor K^ang Hi, h^ w^s assigned a residence at Dolon Nor $ ^ fH (or ^ W)y ^^ *^® territory of Jeh-ho, with powers of spiritual control over the Mongols of Ch'ahar ; and he enjoyed the special favour likewise of the prince who afterwards reigned with the title Yung Cheng. This sovereign converted the palace appropriated to his use whilst heir apparent into a vast and gorgeous monastery, which still retains its name of Yung Ho Kung |K ft ^^ conferred upon it during his occupancy; and, by decree of the emperor K'ien Lung, the successor of the original Chang-chia *Hut*ukht*u removed his residence from Dolon Nor to this place? Here the ceremony of drawing lots from the golden urn is performed in the case of all such ^^hut^ukht^u as do not fall within the jurisdiction of the Tibetan government; and State services are performed under the direction of the Metropo- litan, who is said to chang Mao ^ JK;, or wield supreme religious sway. The principal ^hut^ukJu^u of the metropolitan organization are enumerated below, in the order assigned to them by Decree inA.D. 1786: 599.— MiNCHUB ^HUT^UEHT^U Ift |% W P^ ■ ]£ ■• 600.— Galdan SibSt^u <Hut'ukht<u f&Wl ^ISkV^ U 1^ ■ IS ■• 601 .— Chiluitg ^Hut'ukht^u 8| ^ 19^ ■ }£ B* ^n*» The foregoing all take rank in precedence of the tsung k^an-pu Mimi ^ OT abbots-in-chief of the imperial lamaseries. Eight other dignitaries of the same class, headed by the Tungkhor JH ^ m ^Hut^ukht^u, are enumerated as dwelling at or near Peking, beside two at Dolon Nor. (-^ Jft ^ j*, B. 52, p. 25). The remaining ranks of the Lamaist hierarchy are as follows : 114 part xii. — tibet and the lamaist hierarchy. 602.— Chang Yin Dzassak Ta Lama ^ EO IL H j£ :^ ^J ^. — Grand Chancellor of the Lamaseries (with seal of office). 603.— Fu Chang Yin Dzassak Ta Lama gij i^ Ep f L H jE :^ 5B Ijflf.— Vice-Chancellor (as above). 604. — Dzassak Lama JL SI iS !!ip!l 8R- — Rulers or Superiors of lamaseries. N.B, — Dzassak signifies a ruler or chieftain {see Part. XI, No. 537). 605. — Da Lama j^ ^ |j|^. — Prior of a lamasery. This dignitary is invested with the control over the management and services of the monastery to which he belongs, subject to the commands of the dzassak lama of the locality. 606.— Fu Da Lama g!| g| i| ^.—Vice-Prior. K ! 607. — HiE^ San Lama ^ ^ IU S^. — Lamaist clergy (without special office, but ranking above the grades mentioned below). 608.— Te-mu-ch^i ^ ^ 5|p.— [Mong. Z^wicA'i].- Steward of a lamasery. The dimcliH lama, subject to the authority of the prior (see above) attends to all the secular a flairs of the monas- tery. Also written ^ /fC ^. 609. — K^h-sze-kwei |gf Jg ^. — [Mong. Gishlmi or CHhhui], — Precentor. Conducts the choral services. 61 0.— Keh-lung II H.— Gileng (Gylong). Priest of the first order. 611. — Pan-ti JBE ^. — Bandi. Priest of the second order. 61 2.— Sha-pi 0^ >i:>.— Shabi. Novice. APPENDIX. SECTION I.-GHINESE OFFICIAX HAKKS. The present work would be incomplete without some general ontline, at least, of the system under which the ranks of the Chinese official administration are organized. The bureaucracy which forms the most active and important element in the national life of China is a subject, indeed, not easily to be dealt witli in a narrow compass. As the outcome of the history of two thousand years, and inspired with traditions descending from periods of fabulous antiquity, the huge fabric which is revered as Uio depositary of all honour and all authority may well be thought capable of defying attempts at analysis on any but the broadest scale. Such particulars, at the same time, as are needed for a general comprehension of the methods pursued in the ez^isting organization, the results of which it has been sought to elucidate in the preceding sections of this work, may nevertheless be briefly assembled. The Chinese official hierarchy, as it is found esta- blished in the Ta TsHng Hxoei Tien or Collected Institutes of the Empire, is in all its leading features a continuation of the system gradually established under the Ming dynasty, whose tenui*e of power was marked, in the fifteenth and sixteenth centuries of our era, by the introduction of the principle of universal competition for literary degrees as the means of obtaining access to rank and office, and by the mapping out of the territories of the Empire in the divisions which still, for the most part, subsist. In Part IX of the present work, the method by which advancement is obtained in the various degrees at the official Examinations is categorically set forth ; and it now remains to elucidate, with the help of the details afforded by the Institutes, the system of classification ordained for the ranks of the public service. Under the head of s/ie tain ft |^ or the "official career,*' it is laid down that the privilege of cli^u ahen ti] ^ or " advancement'* 116 SECTION I. — CHINESE OFFICIAL RANKS. — in- other words, of public employ — may be obtained from eight different starting-points, which may be enumerated as follows, with references appended to those passages in the body of the present work in which they have been severally dealt with: i. Tsin She ^ i. — Metropolitan Graduate. (See Part IX, No. 473). ii. Ka Jen jjjk A» — Provincial Graduate. (See Part IX, No. 472). iii. Kung SMng ^ ^. — Senior Licentiate. (See Part IX, No. 471). iv. Yin ShSng Jg ^. — Honorary Licentiate. The holder of a certificate granted in consideration of services rendered to, or suffering undergone on behalf of, the State by a progenitor of the person thus distinguished. According to the circumstances of the case, the holder of such a certificate is termed either ngSn yin shSng jg, jS £ or nan yin sliSng 11 ^ ^ (see Part VIII, No. 455). V. Kieti Shing ^ ^. — Collegian of the Imperial Academy (see Part II, No. 247). Distinguished as Ngin Sheng ,@, ^, receiving the degree after an examination, and Li ShSng ^ ^, obtaining the same privilege by purchase, according to the now almost invariable usage. vi. ShSng Yoan ^ g.— Licentiate. (See Part IX, No 469). vii. Kwan Hioh ShSng '^ ^ ^. — Pupil of the Banner Schools pertaining to the Manchu military organization, or of the schools ■ established for the benefit of imperial clansmen. viii. lA j[. — Government Clerk. (See Part VIII, No. 456, Note). The two higher classes of graduates, the Uin-she and kil-jSn, are collectively designated as k*o Ida ch'u shSn f| 7 Hi ^ (see Part IX, No. 467), and these, with the two next following classes, take rank in what is ofiicially designated the chSng t^u ]f« ^ or "proper path," i.e, the duly constituted avenue of advancement. By courtesy, also, the remaining classes, candidates from which SBCnOi!? K — CSIXBB OFflCUL KA:nE& 117 obUin emploTmoit thioogh the splem otpao iii {K j|| or ^^recouK mcfidjitioDy"" L€L, sekdion br eompetefil »athorin\ mfe iiko reoognued as baving entered the poblie serriee on m similar fooliiig. A sabsidiaij means of obtaining rank and offiee> tbe Han gku JS 4ft ^^ pnichase-sTstem, wbicb has no\r almo^ bope« lesslv oTershadowed the ^' proper path/* althongh recogniaed in the Institates and periodicallT resorted to since the days of the Ming dynasty, owes the prodigious derelopment it has now amved at to the necessities imposed on the Grovemment by the first war with Great Britain and, a few years later, by the oatbreak of the Taiping rebellion. The year 1M3 saw the introduction of a sale of official titles, to a limited extent, which famished a precedent for the extension of the system thronghout die Empire by a Decree dated December 13th, 1850, sanctioning proposals to this effect on the part of the Board of Revenue.* Immense sums of money have been obtained, since that period, by the sale of patents of rank or of steps of advancement in actual employ; and alUiough, as a result of this policy, the Empire has been flooded with hosts of titular officials, beyond all proportion to the needs of the public service, it is undeniable that in some respects advantage has accrued from it to the public interest. The purchase-system, whilst admitting thousands of corrupt and incapable persons to official positions, has at the same time opened avenues of advance* ment to a class which is unfettered by literary traditions and prejudices, and has tended to weaken the hold of the narrow maxims of antiquity upon the conduct of public affairs. In continuance of the regulations enacted under the Ming dynasty, the existing system classifies all civil and military offices under nine degrees of rank, or, more properly, under eighteen, inasmuch as each rank or class— p^m a,— is divided into principal, chSng j£, and secondary, ts^ung |£. To these must bo added a nineteenth, or supplementary, class, embracing some of the lowest offices, to which the name of wei juh liu ^ A j% (^*^» **the * Ck'ow Manff She Li fl§ ffilft fft^ Memorials and Regulation! of the Board of Bevenuei 1850. 118 SECTION I. — CHINESE OFFICIAL RANKS. stream-not-yet-entered") is assigned. A distinction, something analogous to which may be discovered in the Russian institution of the tclnriy is drawn between rank, the p^in ^ as above mentioned, with its accompanying qffiee, or chili ]||, and the actaal post or official charge, jen ^, to which appointment may be obtained. Although the three conditions are coordinated, in theory, by a series of minute regulations, rank and official employ are practically distinct and may be held irrespectively one of the other. The rank prescribed by regulation for the incumbent of each separate office is indicated as concisely as possible, in the body of the present work, by combinations such as 1 a, 1 b, and so forth, for the ^* principal" or "secondary" degrees of each of the nine classes. For the nineteenth or supplementary class referred to above, the equivalent "unclassed" has been adopted. Once invested with office in any degree of rank, as the result of competition or purchase, a Chinese official is placed upon the list of candidates for employment in the category to which he has been admitted, unless, indeed, as now habitually occurs, he has purchased a simple brevet — hien ^ — without pretensions to official employ. Whether admitted to his official position by competition or by purchase, the candidate is required to seek presentation in imperial audience, yin hien ^\ ^, before his claim for employment is recognized by the Board of Civil Office or of War as the case may be. This formality having been accomplished, the candidate takes his turn in the periodical "drawings" which are held in the course of each month at the offices of the Board, when the province of the empire in which feach individual among the succes- sive batches of candidates shall serve is determined by lot. When nominated in this wise to a provincial staff, the candidate, be he District Magistrate, Sub-Prefect, or Prefect by rank, on presenting his credentials to the local government, is enrolled upon the list of "expectants," the Iiow-pu pan ^ ^ JfiE, and resigns himself to a period of unattached service which may last for a considerable number of years. During this period of expectancy, however, a variety of forms of temporary employment, in connection with the judicial or revenue administration or upon special missions, are SECTION I. — CHINESE OFFICIAL RAfTKS. 119 aecessible to the class of unattached officials, who discharge the duties confided to them in this manner under the generic designa- tion of wei yilan ^ ^ or delegates. From this expectant stage, the duration of which may be abridged by purchase or by recom- mendations on account of special services, the candidate at length emerges into substantive employ, which is prefaced by a year of probation — die yung {( ^ — made obligatory in all ranks from that of Intendant of Circuit (Taotai) downwards. Above the rank of Taotai, beyond which the operation of purchase scarcely extends, the system of "expectancy" ceases to operate, officials of the higher grades being either in continuous active employ or in retirement. This last-named condition is frequently brought about by means of a striking peculiarity of the Chinese system, in accordance with which every official is liable to be withdrawn from active service by the death of either of his parents. On the occurrence of such an event he is required by a stringent regula- tion to retire at once for the observance of the mourning rites — ting yeo "J* j| — during a period of nominally three years, in reality twenty-seven months. On the part of Manchu officials, the national custom restricts this period of mourning to one hundred days. Among the many devices which have been introduced in the Chinese system, with indifferent success, to provide a check upon corruption and misconduct, two may be especially noticed here. One of these is the rule prohibiting civil employes of whatever degree, with the exception of the local directors of instruction, from holding office in their native provinces ; and another is the practice of vacating office by the junior of two relatives who may be brought into contact with each other, within certain prescribed limits, in the same provincial area. This is designated hwd pi ^ ^ or "respectful withdrawal" in the presence of a superior. When to these checks upon the tenure of office is added the virtually uncontrolled power which is wielded by the provincial governor over his subordinates of the class of ti-fang kwan ^ jl^f §, or "local authorities," i.«., the Prefects, Sub-Prefects, and Magistrates or Assistant Magistrates of various degrees, in the exercise of his functions of "impeachment" or "denunication" — 120 SBCTIOIT I.— K3HmESB OFFICIAL RANKS. ts^an hSh jff^ ^ — as a result of which wholesale removals or degradatious continually occur, it will be seen that the position of a Chinese official^ especially in. the lower ranks, is at all times eminently insecure. With the foregoing particulars respecting the structure of the public service in China, the indications embodied in the several parts of the present work may be found the more readily avail- able. For a host of questions relating to minor details, such as cannot fail to suggest themselves to the student's mind, there can be no escape from the necessity of consulting the stores of information classified in the Ta IVing Hwei Tien and its vast appendices. SECTION II. — THE CHINESE SYSTEM OF DISTINCTIVE, &C. 121 SECTION II.-7THE CHINESE SYSTEM OF DISTINCTIVE COLLOCATION OF CHARACTERS. An element of Chinese composition, due in part to the structure of the language itself, and in part to the rigorous formality of its written style, is the "elevation" of characters by different degrees as a means of indicating respect or reverence in varying gradations of importance. This graphic expedient takes the place, in fact, of the employment of either capital letters or a more conspicuous form of type in alphabetic languages, for the repre- sentation of honoured names or ideas; and, whilst its significance is infinitely more extended than any of the devices in vogue for the expression of respect, either at present or in past times, in Western countries, the system is applied under circumstances and subject to rules which cannot be safely ignored by any student of the language. The canon according to which the elevation of the written character is regulated is laid down with much minuteness in the K'o Ch'ang T'iao Li l^^iSk W? or Rules for the Literary Ex- aminations; but it is needless to undertake, for the purposes of the present work, any more than a condensed analysis of these prescriptions. The principle upon which the system is based may be most readily explained by premising that, as the ordinary method of writing in Chinese consists in the arrangement of characters, one after the other, in vertical columns, each column being, under ordinary circumstances, complete from top to bottom, respect is indicated by the elevation of certain characters to the top of the column next ensuing after the context, or to still- higher positions above the general level, as the case may be. Passing over, for the moment, the most ordinary token of respect or courtesy — that of position two spaces above the general upper plane — ithe official system of elevation is found to be divided into three 122 SECTION II. — THE CHINESE SYSTEM OF categories, indicative of as many degrees of respect or veneration. The three categories thus formed are distinguished as those of "single," "double," and "three-fold" elevation, these terms denoting the height above the ordinary level of the column to which the character is raised. Respect for the person and attributes of the sovereign and religious veneration for super- natural powers may thus be indicated, as also the sentiments of the same nature which are cherished on the part of imperial personages themselves with reference to their ancestors or elders and to the powers of Nature and the deities whom they worship. The several categories, collectively designated as t^ai sieh f§ ^ or t'ai t^ow f§ ^, may be described as follows : I. — Tan T'ai H |g. — Single Elevation. The raising of the character by one space above the general level is employed in referring to the abodes of Majesty, the Imperial Courty the attributes of government, proceedings by which the sovereign is addressed, and supernatural powers or beings of a secondary order of importance, together with the places at which their worship is conducted. The following examples are selected for the purpose of illustrating each of these subdivisions of the present category, the syllable representing the character elevated being printed in small capitals : i. Tlie abodes of Majesty: Ch^ao m K'UBH m King She :%Gi KUNG fr KuNG men §P1 Tien T4ng Sst mi Tien She Km Tan Pi »m h'PMQ Ch^fin UM ShSng King iSi^, The Court. The Imperial palace. The Imperial capital. The Palace. The Palace portals. The Halls of the Palace. { The Examinations held in the Palace t (see Part IX, No. 467). The Throne and its approaches. The Dwelling-places of Majesty. The capital situated in Manchuria. DISTDIOTIVB COLIOCATION OF CHABACTEBS. 123 TszE Kin Ch*6nff «ii«-f^'^® ^^ prohibited City (the I. Impenal preeincts). TuAJsr-ming Yiian Q §9 H The Scuniaer Palace. ii. Attributes of government: KwoH Kia iM The State. KwohT4 Hfil I"'^® coBBtStution, or dignity, of I i}ie State. KwoH K'o B ^ The revenue. KuNG Ling ^ ^ The laws. iii. Proceedings addressed to the Sovereign: TsiK jm To offer, present. Tsm Knng jg 3| To make tribute-offering. KuNa Wuh ^ f§i Articles of tribute. T^i Pao ffi a&l /^^ report (in a certain prescribed I form). Tsow ^ To memorialize, report to the Throne. 4(*« With reference to the character tsow^ it should be noted that, when used in combination with the .character lo^n H, form- ing a compound signifying " to report for the; Sovereign's informa- tion," its position is a matter of some uncertainty. The character whi being naturally raised by two spaces (se^ Shwang T'ai^ below,) the tsow which precedes it is seen by some Writers to be singly elevated, as usual, whilst others leave it Undistinguished in the column {cMh sieh ^ jg). The following examples, taken from different memorials in Peking Gazettes publisted in close succes- sion, will serve to illustrate both this anomaly in actual practice and also the system of elevation itself: « ^ ^ M m When used in connection with the character mingy to form the compound verb tsow ming ^ 58> signifying "to make report to the Throne," no elevation is given to the character* 124 SBCTIOl? U.— THE CHINBSB SYSTEM OF She Ying Etmg NiEN Hiang iv. References to Supernatural Powers: SnfiN H The gods or spirits. SHftN Che hien yeo JUiilifil ^® ""^"'^^^ interposition of the i. gods. EiAKO Sh^ {C H The God of the River. Hwo ShSn Miao !K || JM Temple of the God of Fire. It E « 1^* (imperial) Temple of Season- i able Response to Prayer. ^ ^ To offer incense. It should be farther noted that in all reproductions of or quotations from imperial decrees of a reigning sovereign, the text of the decree is raised by one place in the document in which it is embodied. For the text of decrees of deceased Emperors, see below. 11. Shwang T^ai C Ii^.— Double Elevation. This distinction is allotted to characters which refer to the person^ aUributeSf or actions of the reigning sovereign or his con- sort, as will be seen from the following examples : H. M. the Emperor, do. do. do. do. His Majesty. H. M. the Empress. The imperial (sacred) person. The celestial countenance. {The celestial favour, — His Ma- jesty's grace. An Imperial decree. Imperial instructions. His Majesty's assent. His Majesty's perusal. {An expression of the imperial will — a rescript or edict {The Vermilion Pencil — equivalent to the ^^sign manual." Ta Hwang T! :fcaft Hwang Ti a« Hwang Shano a± Shang ± Hwang How aii Sb&NG EtlNG mm T*ienY«n Jim T<ienNo£n %B Shang Y6 ±m SiiNSHK M^ YttlflN *« Ye Las «IK Cms ChuPih P'iChun tt« MiNO Chao Eien Pi Kikn PiT&'ZB Em m KmKTKN K'm P'AT K'm Ch'ai P'ai Ch'u mn, mm ftH W ANO MllTQ £* { DISTmCTIVS COLLOCATION OF CHABACTEB8. 125 {Assent, or ratification, by the sign manual. His Majesty's commands. His Majesty's information. To summon to audience. To have audience. To have audience on departure. To have audience (when coming from a distance). As above. Imperially appointed. An Imperial commissioner or envoy. To appoint. j The so verei^'s mandate ({.a.^death- ( warrant). By means of this double elevation of the character, the same effect is arrived at in Chinese as is produced in Western languages by prefixing honorific epithets to the title employed. Thus hwang shang ^ J^, written simply in the ordinary column (as is the case in decrees issued in the names of the Empresses now acting as Regents), must be translated simply as '^ the Emperor;" but Hwang Shang^ elevated according to rule, is fully equivalent to "His Majesty the Emperor." An application of the same system, practically established, although not recognized as yet by any formal canon, is employed for the purpose of designating with a proper degree of respect the countries with which China is now in diplomatic relation. Thus, Ying Kwoh ^ gj, set forth in the body of the column, may mean England, English, British; but Ying Kwoh or Ta Ying Kwoh J^ ^ Bl elevated two places above the line, in correspondence with Ta TsHng Kwoh ;/l; jH H^ the designation of the Chinese Empire, conveys the meaning of Great Britain as a sovereign state, or "the British Oovemment" It is important to observe that the double elevation of the characters set forth above, and others of the same class, is confined to references to the reigning Sovereign or his consort, on the part 126 SBCTION II. — ^THB CHINES^ STSTEK OF of those from whom a token of respect is due. Sach characters, when used in decrees of the Emperor himself, with reference to his own person or acts, or in decrees issued by the Empresses Regent, are not exalted; but when emplojed in decrees with reference to his Majesty's predecessors on the throne (to whom reverence is due even from the Emperor himself) they are elevated three spaces, in conformity with the principle upon which the following and last remaining category is based. The character KHn 0C is not elevated in the combination K^iii Ts^ze £k ][{;> which is appended with the signification ^^rever- ently this [received] " at the conclusion of all rescripts or decrees when copied out by the clerks of the Grand Council of State. The phrase forms no part of the decree itself, and should not bo translated *' Bespect this ! " as is often erroneously done. III. San T ^ai H il&- — Threefold Elevation. The respect which is due from the sovereign himself toward his ancestors or predecessors of the Imperial line, and their places of sepulture^ his guardians during minority, and the powers of nature and other objects of imperial worship, together with the temples or altars at which this worship is celebrated, is typified by the exaltation of characters to the third degree above the general plane. The following are examples of this form of usage : i. Imperial ^Ancestry and Places of Sepulture: LlEH Tsu yj Jjj^ The earliest Imperial ancestors. LiEH TsuNG JfJ ^ The Imperial ancestors. Sh^ng H His Sacred Majesty. Hwang K^ao ^ ^ [My] Imperial father. iTo " ascend upon the dragon to be a guest on high" (said on the oc- casion of an Emperor's decease). T'Ai Shang Hwang ± ± 1 I ^'' ^T^ ^^^ ^""P"™" ""^^ ^"^ I abdicated the Throne. Hwang T^ai How ^ ic i§ H. M. the Empress Dowager. TszE KuNG ^$ ^ The Imperial sarcophagus. Ling Ts^in ^ f^ The Imperial mausoleum. DISTINCTIVE COLliOOATION OF CHARACTERS. 127 HwEi LiNa ;§ ^ I ^^^^ ^^ ^"® ^^ ^^^ Imperial I mausolea (see Part I, No. 130). ii. The Powera of Nature and Places of Warship: T^iEN 35 Heaven. Ti ^ Earth. The five Temples at which imperial ■rr mc j« i-iu J sacrifices are offered to Heaven, ^^ ** ' Earth, the bun, the Moon, and the Spirits of the Land and Grain. T^Ai MiAO -j^ ^ The Imperial Ancestral Temple. The Temple of the Great Exalted Ta Kao Tien + ^ B < ^""^ ^^^^ ""^'^^ "^^""^ ""^ '"'"'''^'P ^ m a« j fQj. ^YiQ divinities of the Taoist pantheon). ^*^f All those characters, having reference to the Emperor's person, acts, etc., which, when used in connection with a living Sovereign, are doubly elevated, are honoured with tJireefold elevation when used with reference to a deceased sovereign. RESPECTFUL ELEVATION IN CORRESPONDENCE. Distinct from the official categories of elevation, and yet partaking of the same nature with these, is the system pursued in forms of courtesy in correspondence, whether public or private, between individuals. Respect is shewn in correspondence of this kind by elevating the name or attributes of the person addressed to the second space above the general level of the column {shwang t'ai). Persons of rank superior to the writer are similarly honoured when referred to in correspondence. A practice has grown up in the semi-official correspondence between the Chinese Foreign Office and the representatives of foreign Powers, in view of the constant occurrence of passages requiring respectful elevation, in accordance with which all references to the individual addressed, on either side, are merely raised to the head of the column (pHng t^ai 2|i J§). The following is an example of this method ; — 128 SECTION IL — THE CHINESE STSTEM OF DISTINCTIVE &C. M K * m ^ m li ± m m — ' A p. ^ m m m ffr z: » 5* ^ il m 5* * m Both in this style and in that of ordinary correspondence, all references to the person or attributes of a Sovereign necessitate elevation in accordance with the usual rules. In the issue of Proclamations, characters referring to the imperial person, court, etc., are similarly elevated in accordance with the rules set forth above. Beferences to superior authorities are dignified by elevation to the head of the column (p^ing t^ai An additional token of respect for individuals of superior rank is found in the practice of leaving a blank space, equivalent to one character, immediately following the name of the official referred to, when this is raised, with its accompanying title, to the head of the column. In cases where respect in a modified degree may be due to any official person, whose name is not entitled however to actual elevation, the desired result is obtained by leaving a blank space above the first character of his official title in the body of the column. In printed books, where it is important to economize space, the degree of "elevation" to which a character is entitled is fre- quently indicated by a blank space extending over a corresponding number of characters within the column. The courtesy of "elevation" it may also be noted in conclusion, is not extended to the Sovereigns of dynasties preceding that which is actually upon the Throne. SECTION III.— CHINESE RENDERINGS OF EUROPEAN TITLES. 129 SECTION IIL-CHINESE RENDERINGS OF EUROPEAN TITLES* L — ^Titles of Sovereigns and Bulers.* Queen of Great Britain and Ireland.— :7a Ywg [KwoK\ Ta Knn Chu :fc ^ [g] :fc S ±- (In the Treaty of Nanking, 1842, and the T^aty of Tientsin, 1858, the term Ta Ying Kan Chu :fi^1S i ^^ employed as the equivalent of Her Majesty's title; and this precedent, as introdaced in the rendering of the Treaty of Nanking, has been followed in the translation of the words ^^King'' or ^^ Queen" in the majority of the treaties negotiated with European Powers. In order to bring the title of Her Majesty more into harmony with that of the Emperor of China — described as Ta TsHng Ta Hwang-ti :kfll:kdi ft — ^® phrase was slightly altered in the rendering of the Convention of Peking, 1860, thenceforward standing as it is given above, i.6., with the addition of the word Ta or ^^ Great" to the characters Ktln Chu). Empress of India. — Yin-tu Haw Ti PPft j§ ft. (Creden- tials of Ewoh Sung-tao, Envoy Extraordinary to Great Britain, October, 1876). EiiPEROR OF the French. — Ta Fah Kwoh Ta Hwang-ti ^ life ■ A fi ft* (French Treaty of Tientsin, 1858). President of the United States. — Ta Met Kwoh Ta PSh- U-nih'^t'ien'tSh ^HHi^fdiiS^tt. (Additional Articles signed at Washington, 1868. The rendering of "President" by the phonetic compound given above was originally adopted at the negotiation of the first United States' Treaiy with China in 1844, and it has continued subsequently in use as the recognized equi- valent for the title of the elected Rulers of republican — min chu * These are invariably elevated by two spaces above the general level (skwang tai). See Pftrt II, arUe. 130 SECTION m.— CHINESE RENDERINGS OF EUROPEAN TITLES. J5 i — communities. The designation selected for the United States, in the Treaty of 1844, was Holi Chung Kwoh ^ ^ gj, — a term adopted with the view of expressing the Federal character of the United States' aiSministration ; and in the Treaty of Tien- tsin, in 1858, the rendering was expanded into the following characters: Ta A^mei-li-kia Holt Chung Kwoh ;K; 3S % 3 S ^ fk W' ^"4^ unwieldy compound has now, however, been abandoned in favour of the designation employed in 1868). Czar of Russia. — Ta Ngo-lo-aze Kwoh Ta Hwang-ti :^ ^ li ^ B :fc S: ^* (Treaty of Peking, 1860. In the translation of the Treaty signed at Tientsin by Count Futiatin, in 1858, the twm employed is Teze Chwan Chu ^ 4^ £9 by which, apparently, "Autocrat^' is meant to be rendered. In the concluding article of the same Treaty the expression Siting Chu Hwang-ti £ ^ S ^ — Sacred Lord and Emperor — is applied to the sovereigns of both the contracting Powers). German Emperor. — Ta Teh Kwoh Ta Hwang-ti :K; ^ B ^ ^ ^. (Employed in correspondence since the assumption of the above title by the King of Prussia. The character T4h ^, adopted as the national designation for Germany, is an abbrevia- tion of TSh'i^he ^ ^ i^, employed as the phonetic rendering of the word DetUsch (German) in the Treaty signed at Tientsin in 1861. In this instrument, the King of Prussia is designated as Ta Pu Kwoh Ta Kun Chu^^%:)^1^ i). Emperor-King of Austria-Hungary. — Ta Ngao-aze Ma- km Kwoh Ta Hwang Shang :fc|i*fJiftlH:*;l-t' (Treaty of 1869. In this instrument, the compound "Ma-kia" is employed as an equivalent of " Magyar-orszdg," or Hungary). King of Denmark.— Ta Tan KwohTa Kan Chu :fzitWi *S ±- (Treaty of 1863). King of the Belgians.— Ta Pi Kwoh Ta Kan Chu ^ flj B ^ S £• (Treaty of 1865. In this instrument, Pi^lUshe vHi ^ JHf ^^ adopted as the rendering of Beige or Belgique). King of the Netherlands.— Ta Ho KwoJi Ta Kun Chu :fc % B ifc S £• (Treaty of 1863. In this instnuneBt, the SECTION III. — CHINESE RENDEBINOS OF EUROPEAN TITLES. 131 older designation Ho-lan ^ ||f, formerly in use as the equivalent of " Holland," was superseded by the character given above). KiiJg of Sweden and Norway. — Ta Jui-tien Kwoh No-wei Kwoh Ta ^«n aw ^ § H H J5 IS a * ^ i- (Treaty of 1847). Queen [or King] of Spain. — Ta JUi-sze-pa-ni-a Kwoh Ta Kun C/m :fc' H JB B ;e 35 H :^ g ±. (Treaty of 1864. According to this instrument, the name Lu-sung g 5|5, from LuQon, the native designation of the Philippine Islands, which is commonly applied to Spain itself by the Chinese, should be abandoned). King of Italy.— Ta 1 Kwoh Ta KUn Chu^H/^Jgi :fcg i- (Treaty of 1866). Mikado of Japan. — No title for either of the sovereigns of the two contracting Powers is employed in the Treaty concluded between Japan and China in 1871. The Treaty runs in the name of the two countries, Ta TsHng Kwoh ::X; JH BJ and Ta Jih-pin Kwoh :;K; B ^ B* The equality of the two Powers is fully expressed in the position of the characters and in other needful respects). President of Peru. — Ta Pi Kwoh Ta Peh-li-sze'tHen-Uh ^ IKB:fcf6aM35S- (Treaty of 1874. In this instrument, Pi-lu ^ ^ are the characters employed to represent the word Peru). 11. Designations of Governments, Departments of State, and Public Functionaries. The Government (head of the State). — Ch^ao THng, f| ®; or Kwoh Kia B ^.* The Government (Ministers of State collectively. — Ch^ao I * It should be noted also that the word Kwoh B alone is not unfrequently used in the sense of " Goyernment/' in which case it is elevated (tan fai) by one space above the general column level — See Part II, ante. Thus, in the combina- tion Ting Kn>oh ^ ■, elevation as above stated would convey the meaning ^'British Government;" whereas, when employed without elevation, the same characters would signify ^* England" (or Great Britain), *' British" or "English," without reference to the soyereign or the government 132 SBCTION III.— CHINESE RENDERINGS OF EUROPEAN TITLES. Ta Ch'hi t8i%^^\ or, Piy^g K'nan Ta Ch'hi J|l:feS- ^^y T'ing Ch'iu g g. The Imperial Parliament (of Great Britain and Ireland).— / a% Kxooh Hum li ift B #• The Upper House Shang T^ang The Lower House Eia T^ang Member of Parliament Kwoh Hwei Ts^an I The Privy Council Chung Koh Privy Councillor Chung Koh Ts^an I Cabinet Treasury Home Office Foreign Office Colonial Office War Office ± Admiralty India Office Board of Trade Post Office Shu Mill Yuan Tu Che Yarn Nui Ching Yamin Wax Chhig Yamin Fan ChSvg YamSn Ping ChSng Yarn/n {Shuei She Ping Ching Yam4n ( Tsung Li Yin~tu Ching \ Wuh YamSn Shnng Ching Yamin Yeo Ching Yamin ^^^ Local Government Board Hu Cliifng Yamin Office of Works Kung Citing Yamin High Court of Judicature T'ung Fah Sze First Lord of the TrlJ^'ryCP^^^^^^ ^^n Show Siang flgJgKt* Cabinet Minister Ch^tng Siang Chancellor of Exchequer Tu Che Y&an She Lord Chancellor La Fah Ta Hioh She Judge Nieh Sze Under Secretary of State ^M Li Ta Ch'in Clerk of a Department SeeXwan^'^^otTeungJPanig^^ SECTION III. — CHIKBSE RENDERINGS OF EUROPEAN TITLES. 133 Chancellor of University Chang YUan Hioh She Lord Lieutenant Lord Mayor Alderman Justice of the Peace Barrister Police Magistrate Police Tsieh Tu she 0£^ Chih Nien Show She Shin K'i || :^ #$i^^ Shin KH Chang Fah Sliin She La She Pu Wuft Che Swei (Pu Yih or \ Ch'a Kiel Ping III. Diplomatic and Consular Titles. Ambassador Envoy and Minister Plenipotentiary* Minister Resident Charge d' Affaires } Secretary of Legation Chinese Secretary Consnl-General Consul Vice-Oonsol Interpreter Consular Assistant Student Interpreter f T'ow ting KHn Ch'ai I Ta Ch'Sn Urh tSng KHn Ch'ai Ta Ch'en fSan tSng ICin Ch^ai \ Ta Ch'Sn Shu KHn Ch'ai Ta Ch'in Ts^an-tsan $9 (in dif- ferent classes, as 1st Secretary, T^ow teng Ts'an^tsan M ^ ^ 9t, ^ and so on). Han Wuh Ta^an-tsan^ Tsung Ling She Kwan Ling She Kwan Fu Ling She Kwan Fan Yi/i Kioan Fu Fan Yik Kwan Fan Yih Hioh ShSng AS * The fuU title assigned to Her Britannic Majesty's Minister Plenipotentiary inChinaisasfoUows: * iS^ «k H S fj + * ffi !£ fx » ;/t 6- The ordinary designation employed in conversation and correspondence is chu Una ta oh e/i it 3§C :;^ E- The expressions kung she ii^ ^y and she chin ^ Eg, heretofore often erroneously used in correspondence, have been formally aban- doned by the Chinese government. t This rendering is adopted in lieu of the expression Han Win Cheng She SI 3t iE ffi> formerly employed m the equivalent of " Chinese Secretary," 134 SECTION ni. — CHINESE BENDERIHGS OF EUROPEAN TITLES. jjVban- British Supreme Court (Shanghai) Chief Judge of \ ^r ic ci oupreme Court j ^ Deputy Chief Judge Fu Nieh^sze Law Secretary Sze^li Hieh-shSn Kwan cli^a She YamSn fiJSf'ffi^W ^m^ 19:% PJ IV. Indian and Colonial Titles. Viceroy of India < Yin-tu Til Kien Tswh Tu PPSftlttiUt Ta Ch'Sfi Commissioner of a \ rr i' m j-itc^ Tmng-tuh Hieh4i Ta Ch'4n I Cheng Kuh Ting Li Kuh Fu Chhig Sze Ngan^ch'a Sze Fu Nieh Sze Province Governor of a Colony Lieutenant-Governor Executive Council Legislative Council Colonial Secretary Chief Justice Puisne Judge Registrar-General of Hongkong Harbour Master Superintendent of Police 5«n Pu Kwan V. Military and Naval Titles: a. Army. Commander-in-chief, \Ping Ma Yuan Shwai or JcMICfib; or - -^'"-'-^ ^--^"^ f King Lioh %^ ^^ '^^^ ' }■ Hwa Min ChSng Wuh Sze ^JglgfciJr^ Ch'wan ChSng Ting JlSttJi or Field Marshal General Lieutenant-General Major-General Brigade-General Colonel Tsiang Kiln jflFJS T'ow'teng TH-tuh Kiln-m^^^^^^lgif^ TH'tuh Knn-mSn ||§ 5 f^ Tmng^ping ^£^ Fu-tsiang gjjff ♦ The foregoing titles, from "Executive Council" downwards, are taken from a list officially published by the government of Hongkong, in Notification No. 210 of December 28th, 1874. The word cJi'u /£, it may be noted, would be prefer- able, in substitution for kilh ^, in the rendering of " Council." SXOTIOK m.— CfHINESfi BENDSBIKOS OF SUROPBAK TITCB8. 185 Lientenant-Colonel Ts^an-tsiahg ^JK Major Yeo'ki fj^^ Captain Tu-sze |P^ Lieutenant . Show^pei i^H Sub-lieutenant Ts^ien^tvung if|| Sergeant Pa-'tsung IQH Corporal Wautvei f/^,^ Private Ping^ting Jg^f Cavalry soldier Ma Ping JB||^ Artillery „ P'ao Ping ^^ Infantry „ Pu Ping ^|^ Engineer Km ^ung Ping IRXI? Military Secretariat; & ) ^. „ , ^, Military Secretary f ^'""S^ ^"* <^*'" SSA Adjutant Ft'A Chang Hg Aide-de-camp CAMnjf JTiXn ij^jv Surgeon /^w^an ||<g» Commissariat, and 1 ^ . ^, . Commissaiy / ^'^''9 T'at ^^ b. Navy. Commander-in-chief Shuei-^ske T'ung Ling ;j^mKfi| Admiral / T'ow-Ung Shuei-she Ti^tuh M^il:U%!fH \ KUn-mSn [SIK* Vice-Admiral (Urh^tSng Shui^she Ti^tuh nflf^fiPJUl ( KUn-^mifii [Sn Rear- Admiral (San-tSng Shuei-she Ti^tuh Hft^Jtttiilf Commodore Shuei-she Tsung^t'ung ;jt6V||!||| Post-captain (senior) Tmng-^Ping mSi do. (junior) Fu-tdang mm Commander Ts'an-tsiang ^^ Surgeon IKwan jg>^ Lieutenant-commanding YeO'ki MWt • .The ordinary colloquial designation for an Admiral is Shuei-sh<, rutuh. The title £iin MH is employed only in correspondence. ids sBcmoir m.-^-ORijrBBx xsNDSsxikn of xmK^ sah mm. Lieutenant (ainior) Tu'8ze mn do. (junior) Shaw'pei ^m Sub-lieutenaai Ts^ien-isung ^m Engineer Offioer Sze Lun Kwm nnt Midshipman Eioh Shhig m^ Warrant Offioer Tauten FSng m« Petty Offiear Lififf'-ts^ui mm Seaman P'ao Show m^ Marine Pu Ping ** Secretary to an Admiral Ying Wuh Ch^u «»« Flag LieoteiMint Chung KUn +:» Surveying Offroer Ts'ih^liang Kwcm Mfttr KBLLT k WAL8B, UMTISD, PEIKTSBB, SHAKaHAX. INDEX OF CHINESE CHAEACTEES. — BADICAL 1. ■^ H*|373,iii, Hj||283; = ^472;HK86; Ha 136; Hat 136; jft79;H^l«0«C 517;HJ»«rM182,x, H M « 414; ± IB K86. T S » 379. ;p X A fl' 23, 24. T iu. IS IS ^10, 39; ill S 455; igg^454;-KS9{583; i£ 11^^28, 454 ;i!| «j!E®387. o&-% i^\i^ 288. I RADICAL 2. 4* +«2;4»^135; + tt 147 ; ift K H 148 ; (f* ± kiu 3l wu fT«272; + U;^^ 456; 4» it :* * 456; + 2g 274; + H it 272 ; rf. II 273, 453 ; *f* ^ 576. '^ RADICAL 3. chu i^l;i^65,166;i Igt 166; i 0227, 292. Za RADICAL 5. :ft. PI S * 348; :ft. fi A 456;^ 6 517. J RADICAL 6. y« «a3E48. H RADICAL* 7, "^ i:p291;-^477;- & * A 456. S# 200, 231; SHU ±211;£tiE265; £i«342;3LM^£ 189, 342. 138 INBBZ OF CHIHBSB CHARACTBBS. king RADICAL 8. ^, ^ 339. 8%n \ RADICAL 9. ling «||S t 356. rf» if SI 207 J if « US 456 i^WHSLt^ 456. ^«!rt«362j>^:^ft301. cfcih i^ ^ M 379. peh tso m the she 1? 5$ 569. >^ 289. #^BHE515;fll!^}|| St 557. ffi 455 ; f6 ^ 532, 563 ; (6 « m 373, iii. «tl5l97;tE5|322;ffi 15: 288; B m 387, 429, 544. ^|ttpS85:f#j^ff g96;#lr>l«l;f# iai86;#g|206;f# Hl^ ± 204; f^ ^ 205; ft 18 ^±203. ^ n 468. M^iT ^i%S411. ch'toan. ft |t 477. *•««» ^ ^ 334. iS ft ^3 492; Itm 493; ft jE 394 ; ft t 495. S ft K ^471. JL RADICAL 10- ^ *«>««<» 3fc«^#230;3feil;*:* 456. « w. j£ 5i l!5 i 53 ; ^ ft :S 512. Jioui g| 455. P3 nu* 7^ RADICAL 11. ^83;^iiil§83; ft|gl34;ftgi^± 143;ftSf#fl^± 144;feS|irS151i raOBX OF OHIHXen OEABiLCTBBS. 18» 147 ; ft 5lh SI 1& 508 ; ft «| 83, 379; ft :^ E 93;ft««5f62;ft|| 483; ft JK: 16 1^ 483 ; «ll«^482. ««w^ ffi K 274. A RADICAL 12. -t pah Aa[379;;\p«J|A466. *tmj ^ 21, 455 ; ^ i 12 ; ^ + ^ » 387. :^ ^ 153, et seq.; jf; ^ 247; pf; ^ 188. ^S|J156;£^Ji280; :S ^ W it » 343; jg ll^@Jitl|344. liu J9L *«35;J(tJ|212,253; H jg 146, 341, 254; 4k A 294. kim II 455 ; ^ ^ 339. RADICAL 14. iman M9L^ 112. JJ RADICAL 18. ^387. ch! iW SP 273 ; fij ^ 273. JO ««*« M A ^84. SI] 1»5l;^Ei07;fl5r«Ef^ «S403;fr«[S405; m»433; nn^ 401 ; Hr IR 564. SII«187;glJA334;giJ SC ^ 340 ; lU H ^ 471; glja^t 58; glj ii H f@ 384; glj ||{ H 370, 381, 427 ; glj JH 442 ; glj 3^ 442 ; glj I? 448 ; glj HJ 492 ; glj^ ^336; gH ^ 472;glJlB164;g||g ■& 338 ; glj m 378 ; glj m 306-; glj i ^ 480 ; glj ^t 480; glj IK « 480;g|jJt^|Ll]£ :X: i«j l« 603 ; glj ^ Hi Wl 606 ; glj gS :g 536 ; glj JNf :S 552. ;fy RADICAL 19. ^» |&»256. fidtl 15 455. 140 INDEX OF CHIKIBSS CHABACTEBS. yung M ^^9 ; 465. Uumj 3^ M ^66. Wan Si ^ 550. hun ® If ffi M 387. iS nan 1i ^ RADICAL 20. -a Q^ 36,379; Q^^ m37;€i^«m38. {i RADICAL 21. -f* RADICAL 24. .Wfc +At272;qi|®i[5]8. t.*e» ^ ^335; ^5^447 ;=f- II 447. pL ^MBM 388. »:*:E56i;iawt5t 573 ; ia a ^ W 540. llf4b#*El52;iflS 88;* 1)1247; if* M259. If i 240, 252. f* RADICAL 25. -^ » 517. P RADICAL 26. fP l!r « IR 382; EP » « 5?, 385; fpjgtsgi. Jtinj ^ 232. j^ /^ S" 182, ii; 4C a 585. cho ^mB9i511;^;g1|} 577; $. ^ If fUM^ 594. ^k iai»*Jiil36;KI? 136; IS at K5 175, 245; ft 439 ; ia •& 442 ; 18 ^428;iaiK352;JS; ngih «hoio P RADICAL 27. JE # It 518. J^ RADICAL 28. ^ {R 37, 382, 383, 384, 543;^»295;«i3^ 443 ; 3R {» 443; ^ HT 443 ; « K :fc E 558. % RADICAL 29. li^ S 150, 483, 487. INDEX OP CHINMB CHAKACrTERS. 141 t'at yeo % sze P BADICAL 80. ^ iS 538 ; ^ it 550. $#II5161;^|f1fl99; »iafel87,274;^ **& + A225;;e# «^«-? 223; ^3g 294. See 2£. 3 439; gJH 282, 284 J SI§ 152, 166, 343; ^1152;^iS^ 343, 344; 3 fl^ 33; ^E 171; ^ I E 422 ; ^ a 305 ; g |5f 11182, iii; ^ HI 306; nm$S^ 176; ^ IK 246; fl^ 170,302; R)^279;^|gjg2% .i|224;^|jfl68;g II|250;SIJJ167. i^h # W tt Ejf 425. § # i|S 373. ehao It :fc g 585. ^»282;^^f^481; 1^ Ji ± ffl # 477. £ ^ 153; |g ^ 456; fi S 287, 345. 1^ •hu 'ho 'ha ■^if« 374; If II 1(3^ 585; If IJISSB 589. ■ *Hi^iJ4;ft^®ja 3E 17; ftS^JiJE 173; %iW^^ Mm 174; ft ^!|t 521, 525. »&S3£582;I^Pi|| #533. eMh yOan ^ ^ ^ 164. s/iao P^ 439. KM '^ «l«||684;!Ba|585. «M;f:95iO;||f^^ # G 596. ea«g JS'j5r#564. »'«»«? lar^t 4#E570; isf J: 568. ««|i$517;|$nf8gp« 11314; l$1i«£i| 512;l|flirii!}iC.611. *ltffi^279;||«t 496. m W :ll}- il P$ ■ 587, 600;|!Hlr||567;|!g S567. <^n P ka 142 n SMe INDEX OF CHINBSB CHARACTBES. wei ± JH RADICAL 31. |J5^ 614; 18^548. Bill 379; Hill ^^ 20 ; a jisr a i 13. B£f|215. yi«.» m RQ a 88 ; n i^ SI A IE 416 ; H Jg 585, g^ 436,548; g^lit 437 ; B ift H ^ 438. i RADICAL 32. ± t 328 ; ± ;l5f W fg 328;±g329;±|R ^511; ±m^^ 5-^0; ±j»HfFfi5517. ft'au ^ ^ 588. tJ^g fe & 469. IB « 374. ii. ± RADICAL 33. &ng 5ft ^ 439, 452. to fari art 344. a «iHM357;J«P5l| 3S9 ; « 1^ J» 371 ; J8 ii « 506. ?S tt 162; ^115+ 64; ^ i l|p 65, 165. ^ #1|182, xvi. ;^ RADICAL 36. «> «| 879 ;«» 11483 ; ^ £«'&486;^IH:« ©487;^^^^ 449 ; ^ ^ }C «| 450. «»SSIl&M6;«»Ji508. «J19; |;#tl&598. ^ Radical 37. :*; fl «l 162 ; :fc ^, ffi 162 ; :*; ^ Ji 162 ; :fc ^Jg 162; rfc^a? 162;:^i8iat479;:fc l&l* 188;. :km± 135;:^:^289;:^g 396;:^a443;^^ 472 ; :^ i ^ 479 ; :«: S 5Sf 195 ; :^ 31 # JBI 196;:^a#iJ?j|pi07; iNDBX or casmtsB ohibactbbs. 143 t*ai flng wei 232;:fc^^232;:^ ff A250;:*;f|j|ft232. 35 III if » 557. *Slil37;*Jil38 «#229;t*247; i:«K 268; i;!^ 281. M^ M'M 565. H a ^ 22 ; ^ g ;i| I|27;$g.j(|3it28; 1^ a ^ 88 ; *1t 233; 456 ; $ H ;X; * 456. Uow H ^ iS 1^^' ;^ RADICA L 88. /« iB *. 5, 6. *±*66; 31^ 102; H m 355 ; ^Ji 390, 432 ; -^ «404. p-m jjj[ 7. pin ■y* BADICAL 39. tsze ^ 455. ?L ^'ung F^ 9 214. Wao tSK118;^]g|i|119; 478. /ao/^ » »#fiI5 456;jg| A456. mm 258, 304; |p|^ 257; #1 K 323 ; 4fi ^ 323 ; ^ j^ 323. *^ BADICAL 40, '9't446;*3*JiJ446;«3i |$g439; <^281. Sr«^^334;^||5g 557 ; ^ A 456. ^m29;^Afl5F55;^ J|l58;^,^^iie99; ^fe232;^?&a564. « * « 373. -tJ- ngan tsung ning »«<»» 1lr»ft84;'|f.|S847, 144 INDKX or CBENBSK CHABACTBB8. ting 8uan il£ gij in « 332 ; ^ e|128; J£}$582. r JK A 456. n 331 ; JteiB 456 ; ItaiAS 436 ; 1[ $il W ^ m 315. «»136;g/t221;g K 226 ; ;& :fc 225 ; ar Jcung ;r ^4B]35;^ 11538. ch'a. gfF|gJH?595;^B& HIOSII 349 ; ^ n^ 18 527. «m^363;«i||^ 364; ft £4.57. ^t* JRADICAL 41. Z # ^ 198, 234. it ^9 ^456; »» 456. uSng )» SI 25 to 28, 367, 426, 456, 557. 'J siao 4 Si «««490. >^^ 3ADICAL 42. >J«%»133;>J,^« 418;*J>^j||200. :hao *p^ 162 ; tp^i^ 162 ; '>^ (6 162 ; >> fl H 162 ; fj? SI 3g 162 ; iJ? ^ S 162 ; 4|^ 1$ 140 4? 1i 141 ; il? » 142 0? fll 233 ; >> If 222 fj> ^ 222, 294 ; fl? fj JI«250;iJ?^294;>> Jj!f 294. thanir fq 41^ 160. ill RADICAL 46. lU shan III # 491. ^«j #!SCl1ffi«460. c/iott; A«< «iin (^< RADICAL 47. jH1272,284;iW^J^285; m n 286 ; m^m 286 ; !Hi 1^ 285. ^11274; JSS^Ji 273; JSS m 293 J JS as 348. X RADICAL 48. X i^n« X tt 138- iKOK ov cHimBfiS' cn^RAaneasai tao pa 145 2fe ^ US 161; £ IS fim 185;/fc^glJ«lllA 187; 2fe;ef#gE 198, 234;^3&ff*l®9; 4«?»ffitt861;2fe ft29l;£^«tSr«E li!ffi402;£$i[J^ + *225;2E;ei6|ij 264; ^>&K^270; ««rJ|.|l:^349;^ «iEar«^223;2£ «.JE- 504; 4:^11 ft 496; 2£;&rlltt 505;2£«ft||499; £«&l&498;£« W « 497; ^ ;& MJI 507;2£^JiJ| 506. g< RADICAL 49. a W If 628 ; B # 512; B ■# 465; a^p 565 ; B Jg.ff- 587. r|j feADICA L 50. «ftiS^^275;$if|# ^2; ;iir«i||#533. c'Vo»j flj ^£ 9. pang «j»*E 561, 564, 565; f* RADICAL 5^: •« ^ JE 180; 236. Vu *W«|290; jj5f^339, 368; J(SF272,281j ;fip S 66, 340, 369. iij||617,596;j$||'if »*B5S6;J»:^« 297; jS|||297. rtnj Jg 272. fi aW±210,473;|l|flJ 11210. Zin «5: ai«294; Altf 276. St, n x 303^ a ^ -a' «7. ji ^ 470; sum So. 470- iJL RADICAL 54. fing |g |IJ 196. ^ RADICAL 57. jiarjr48a ;f RADICAL 60. igA:f:Si06; ag 564. v« tt|-Mr:X:S 103; i||tj# « 104; »m^j| mt how 146 INSIX OV CHmiSE CHAB1CTBB8. 105;|ip£189;tt|£ «HB271. M at 31 305 ; at IS 9C Ift 305 ; at M 306; at fj m « 306. cvSis at ft ^^56. tfh* ^ 7t^ H ^^^• i^v RADICAL 61. tf^ r -tgais*. fA fc'io t^ ^ ■ 556. SI ■ ^ JBS^471;lli455; f.ttj»455;lSi:467. hung ^ A 456. IS B H 130 ; lit « 557. S Ain ft ^ ^ 81. u »g| 126; Big 11127. mu *•<»? JK S 9 '^^• :^ RADICAL 62. tSi 18 5$ 579. ^ RADICAL 63. hu, ]^ % 154. fomg § ^ 481. ■^ RADICAL 64. if cfti fL§!|*510; }L#!|# 5il;fLS$ilfF% 517 ; ft SI ^ 537 ; ft, »&«i:>531;afPft* 564, 586 J }L 1 }£ l«l 8^604. ta Jrtt375. It p=< It i^^:^ ^312. cV^git^l!|5456;3|^l[^lrigfc -^^272. pa IE H 448. 'a ^m&47i. eft" ®W^327;Sltffi3 333. e][e ^ IS is ^ 330. S * S E 266. l^n «gS276;«tt469. ^ lifiEmi!)283;|gfi274. IKDSX OF CHOnSl CHASACT1B8. 147 ^ Sa«182,xv. show a 456. ^1^ £189;Sfl|^75; m^m^j^mm 602. ?an ll«476. « HIB 150,217; Jgfit 485 ; H iH 182, xvi; H ^440;Ji^440;|| #:>Ln348;Ji|f^ n347;S#||K323. H fl 309 ; ii g 439 ? «K274;a|^274;a| 3t274;a|g439. m m 329. J^ RADICAL. 66 .7^ IR Si 150, 483, 487. ioi Bfc±«i«328. ^ JKl$303;tfc||305;» •g 472, 303—306. 5)at mtti 1=/ «:«r456. ao m san ttW*393jttff512. «t|210;«!W284;tfc ft:fcE9*- ^<;tt«firn5. ;^ RADICAL 67. tSr 3SC*JR135;UtS323; i|^182,xviii;^JK 11273. >5r RADICAL 70. & *f6 275; J5r^t|150; * ft 492. Hi IR379. RADICAL 72. ev?»9 lg!124:g|fttl25. ^j, ^j|Sf289;l)Q|l9lf^580.* cAao US W 19! 117; BH ifiji B 512. wnj il; K 120. ch'o^ d $ H 88. 148 iHmx OF eHmn ohasacubs. RADICAL 73. Bg 4&1A. ttSI78. ^ RADICAL 74. " «i!t473;im^*456. ;t; RADICAL 75. e» *tlit!|#510,519;tt r»«j )KS2,10;}KWI|116; m^ 135; mmm 583 ; 3K H ^ 365. ^ iEt«Jftl89. 3P, S 512. ^t Kf 45A; t JB a 609; # K 610. nai panflf tff BR ^"7^- ngan m » 468. £ i;g }$ !N Ml 593. ^ flltB57l. yoh I!lflll59j!||^177, S* 1t»209;4i|«321, ftll:fc*456. ^ RADICAL 76, w« fir 35 11260. ywfiflf Tiivow St 4P 'ft ^^' ' Jh RADICAL 77- jg 281, 289 ; iEft 379; jE 6 379 ; jE IE 379 ; aE« 8.79; jE*t 479 ; jE HJ 492. ^ ^ m S 347, 406 ; ^ W «ltli348;^a«f354. « ^ ^^JBJ35;|$J8if£ ^ 182, xi; It-t K 87;|CJB|t»||3182, xvii ; IS m « 273. 592. 8Ut INEKEX OF OKABACZBBS. 149 jt RADICAL 79. J^J RADICAL 81. pi Jfc532; Jfcfi5l57. ^ RADICAL 83. min J5 "pp 153. ;}C RADICAL 85. 439; JlCtt^ 435; iCmm^ 282. s-wn- p\ 439. 690;a?^ir^589;a? 81 516. fto^ j!Jii818;JiJ^326,439; ?i?]ltilirii|g«326; Rr fe J9F 318. ;um ff 516. cS7 Ji&+341jjg_j||.21l4. f«? «R121;«]|tR122. 9l§t «»»? IB iff 1601. hao f&ff#513. AiT j»iP88;JtKflift282; JIIBII£$324;^^ 327. ai ^ 505. yen shuh ^ A 456. hwo fg ^ 564, 589. i&g «S3182;fS^^3^ 524, 562. ts?o ?fgi«S827;?f g439. han ]§| ^^ 379. e7 »li60];.ifji^i|ii|591. v^ Ji 4fc 376, 377, 378. ^ RADICAL 86. tou u 529; ,iifl[#614;.^ 513;.it*^||J|6 4» K :^ E 553. 150 INDBZ 01 CHINB8B CHASACTEB8. cC US » 296 ; H « 296. %fc ^ M IB H 548. y^g Sii^ 80; SliflS 273; ji 379, 489; nil 410, 452. Jt^ RADICAL 87. t«>o't "JS S( 454. >r BADICAL 91. m B 578. 4=- RADICAL 93. tieh muh Ig^ 284. ;>« JP ^ 156. ;^ RADICAL 94. Hit « RADICAL 96. ivmg I]7,46etseq.;3EKl]; Iiff31;I:^E152. Bmm 586. 9 $ 1 55; 9ff [^ 183; It 282; S^^ ^282; S 9 €11 548; 115111 pi M 548. hien, H IP dt 182, iz. ywh S iSI 55. 4fe RADICAL 100. aheng ^ 1 469. BB RADICAL 102. ¥ liu Wa f Jl 383; ^ 547; ^ Jf 581. 1^455. e 11 210. 182, v. ll«IBi$418. Q RADICAL 106. 6 m 595. ■g ^ 337. *l;a±l;^;g 2;a:k^3;SJt& 4;l«10;S^ll. fei pah hiJbang INDEX OP CHINBSB CHARACTERS. 151 JDl RADICAL 109. 9h4ng Si ^ 366. M ^ 9 509 ; |g ;g 535. S25lj 119263,264. g ^ 280 ; g tf 324, 860,361; HElff 484; g RADICAL 109. Ii«272;li^ffl272, chik 284. aiang m B 135. ^f«»182. iy; «a| 274; tffM273, 439; #l|277;§4|t# 3a3;*||Jt278j# m H 279. <u7i ^Ml # « I 47. ^ RADICAL 111. ftlJfip281;^W284;^ K289;,^^300;^ Jt*484. .)5 RADICAL 112. <<'«« ti^$j$69. <M» IIPJ t8ze ^ RADICAL 113. ^W^^; iPi>t9IS415; »t^*«jE238;ip|i ^ ;! it S 239. 11243. -<J> ^ SS249;gJB^|| ©424. A'> )iB # 16. " ll^3E46; jji^ 155. ^ RADICAL 115. »itt f|:J' 469. f4 *><, ^?467;^|iS5 510; ^^^^«J»:lfeE555. shue. W^^X-ffi 314; ift ^^*ffi316. yV RADICAL 116. **«»? $• M 60. jfe RADICAL 117. hang * ]§( 133, 385, 517; ^t X 9 ■ 3£ H 598. fimg Ht^ 468. 152 INDEZ Of CHUnUlK 0HA£AJCT1IBS. jfy RADICAL 118. ii ^ E 575. pa S/:i^^l8V,§$:^l81; * S 541; <a? :K 19 « #,542;ta|H?S :^e248;^^||y *E261. ^RADICAL 119. y^h #J(IBS«|5 324. U^ tt^566;%|t278;;e 283. ^ RADICAL 120. i» f^^fiF 188. &<«« e^ 472; iSMI 295; ill m 55, 295. ^t^h ^ ji 439. ofo 3^11 »f 523. twan ISI$70. ^;;: H 11208. »^ UtW ^52. 1 /«» H m 477. ch'an 8 IP @ 568; hZ II i 42 ; IK ^ 44 ; Hi 272, 289; S^ 291. ^g ««*e63;|»»272, 273 ; « :^ 441 ; « ^ 152 ; It E 186 ; tfttf 420, 437 ; « ]^ 408 ; |B|gl50, 216;||S ff^^^:fcE562; 152 ; « H 218. 't'^ ^ ^ i(fc ft Sf Ji 458. «o ^ ^ 557. c^fc iiSfe^73;||Ji325. ^^ mm^ 30. Pl^ RADICAL 122. "^ J&El73,237;«fgl74j «iRm« 101. ^ RABrcAL m. ^' "•J 8 ^ fN^ 512, INDEX 01* CHIKISII CHABAOTBBS. 153 han Vi Vf' ^ 201. ling |»i|459. :^ RADICAL 125. 182, xix. !^ RADICAL 128. RADICAL 129. ^ RADICAL 132. ^ *^ 276;JjJ-^276. 1^ RADICAL 134. WU la $ A 472 ; H ^ 473. ^ RADICAL 136. H ^ 178. jjNp RADICAL 140. if ^ 329. «>ow ^ 9 $ 514. ffi mtoo ch*a i|^ j$ 72. chwang ffi jR I 51. II wan {on if /aw Sftlii;%^Wmi32. Sf|275; SSM^ 276 ; Ji -g 275. «a Sl^^l'^' ®»455;»|g455. 8U ytw ^!^ il 564; 811587. Jig RADICAL 141. fe» ^tt«413. ff RADICAL 144. king It jfe 259 ; fj ^ 458. ^ ^ ^ fi 346. ^ fj!f564;f(|j$439, 327; mmigt 518. :^ RADICAL 145. i « » 71. .154 JKDBZ or CHnCUI 0HA1SACTXB8. ^ RADICAL 146. ^ .Ii«f2;l«f.iri57;15 Jg i^ 4# 525. aT a a 473. :^ BADICAL 147. 100; 1^9^91. »^ ft 1130; ft 11499. mi 1^ 11^280. ^ RADICAL 148. S j|P:3C472. RADICAL 149. U tf IS 164. ^ m II 306. *oo IS 'fif 466. ?«"» I»«lt489. jR If 242. PJ m 398; SHiHiJS 397. ' Chan mV-M 220;;^ nip: -221. ^ tt%34;S.9«|396; K W 198. h^g g| S 498. If *'<«? 4ff * 199. ]g RADICAL 261. t^ Sffca54S6jSft^SU 456; ^ RADICAL 168. Iw I519E#«5 108. ^ RADICAL 154. M yOan ^ ^ ^ 164. *«^ H ^ 471 ; Jt te 473. ^ )K ifif 282 ; JK J» 291. « JliB5;itA«. INDEX OF CHINISB1 CSASACTEBS. 156 uze g ©: :^ ^ 456. U'ing H 456. t»an 1^ j§ ^ 244; K ^ 226. ^ BADICAL. 156 'ch'ao j^ §, 454. $ RADICAL 159. |g ^ 182, xiii. 11 ^i'ing li:^$i^^ 454. w hwei t|[ !|# 522. ^ RADICAL 160. nung p»^ 1^ ^ :^ E 556, 560, M KADICAL 161. 9k n 154. ^ RADICAL 162. «•««» 1 i& ^ 190; Jl H ^ ^: 191 ; lift ^glljjg 192; ^ >' tain yeo JiW:^El52;lift ^«a|i93;li^|| ^27.9;j|iftgg|g 194; 1^283; ji$ :^*466;i^:A:* 456. ±473; jiiffi^ 477 ; 1 ± R ^ 476. yun ta »444;*g^444;^ iff 444 ;^4Jt 376-378, 626. ^^277; '311^307;^ glJ308;Jgf5 310;g| }|!r.327. Ji280;Jt-A280;Jig( rI 500 ; jt ije.501 ; Jt JE 502 ; Jt t 603. ^*534; ^ !g«fl|||| 585 ;^ Ig flft 606 ; J$ 575. ^ RADICAL 163. yih g, d|: 289. IB lang B + 163; ||5 jj ]f|f 572. m *«n a5aE18;f|5i41;||5g 43; IP f- 281. pi a5^160,273;a5ggl61, 156 INDEX OF OHnniSI OSABAOTEBS. a ]$ 167. ho'oh lis Hi! ^510. no ^m 538. TO « ■547j^fc^532; fU tS 517, t« »E^74;|BJ||380; 184;|pg|445;|QS^ 445; 185^^ 189; 15 ^fi 298; US $298; n & 456. ^Sv9 II SC 467 ; 1$ ^ 45. f^9!IKiR£50 g, EADICAL 166. ch'ung :£Sg||<8|472. ^ RADICAL 167. 557. fh^ |»B^925;i^M439; H^441. ..an? ^ ft 379; ii 6 379;^ «t 379 ; ^ M 379. ruh i|ili|^128. & ^l|ii$110;^ltlll RADICAL 168. c/^«3;S^40;^A32;ft'g ohar,^ fl^'t338;;g'gfl g B 339. P^ RADICAL 169. «« iE*G585;^)R589. ^ «-&190;«jBjr68. ^ it 395, 544; ^ff^m 607. (•"iiaw is W l53. ^ SI S ft 182, vii. Zh |iH'g320. JS SI^^E473. ®^135;H»143, fcoh INDEX OF CHINESE CHABACTEBS. 157 ilZ H :^ ft 317; BS m 324. Shan tn H; ^97. i» J^ |J BADIOAL 170. fi^ Kf li 423, 430 ; jSjf «gp jjl 372. 512;|i^U^550;|l^ G«513;|J^BI!&j^ H? 513 ; il^ i» ^ 1$ 373. y.;nit^mt 525. /« F»^469;|l|a^471. vfiTu K ft 269 ; K ^ 270. m Ung m 18 H^ 6$ 419. 'n:^ ^ [^ 439. tut H^ 439. H RADICAL 173. Kftll3;l|||»455. a/»n w»s ft 1& i^ 267. RADICAL 180. Man? f^ ^ ^ 412. RADICAL 181. mi ' s^n «35lF339;JK|tl|5I52. 15 «il95:^E559;|afl|391, 546, 434 ; ^ ^ 439 ; m ^ I9r ^ ;^ e 92. ngih et a* 190. « S» 15 ; « Wit 588 ; 1i^^^45];|Si^ A » 525. ® ff E 574. :^ RADICAL 184. M fan IK IR ig 182, viii. m 8hih yang « W I? 394. "if RADICAL 185. .U •& iff 281 ; -g- JBR 289. j^ RADICAL 187. "»» imT Jif 392,544jJtU|Jg 458. /» S9 »^ 15. S etJiJsi82,xvi;ja 158 IKDIZ or CHINB8E' CHABA0TBB8. H 182, xvi; e g5 417, 419, 425 ; ft i{ :^ E 565. i^i lif IV il^^ss; £15^456. I* ^ 389, 545, 431 ;: 383. hiao n y^ ISF S 3-19. v» » it « A fl 182, XX. *^ RADICAL 188. rt II til 135. mtng ,% BADICAL 196. in 3t 236. ml 31 '>u^1r filll ^ 231. ^ BADICAL 197. :^«3i];»^:Jt« 313 ;m^'M 280. RADICAL 198. ven i-K Jl A II 393; H in 472. H RADICAL 201. fcKHMtj |ll'?29-;ffftg61; 3ia:564;||.g|^458. H RADICAL 20a. M mi a « 374. ^ RADICAL 210. Wi ^^^M 374 iii* SHAKGHAI: Prtuiedi by KIellt fr. Walsh, Ldotbd. V